Você está na página 1de 2211

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

V100R003C03

Configuration Guide (U2000)


Issue

04

Date

2013-11-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 910

V100R003C03

iManager U2000

V100R006C00

Intended Audience
This document describes how to configure various services on the equipment. This document
describes the basic information and configuration process, and uses configuration examples to
show how to set specific parameters.
The intended audiences of this document are:
l

Installation and commissioning engineer

Data configuration engineer

System maintenance engineer

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
Calls attention to important information, best
practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment damage,
and environment deterioration.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.

Updates in Issue 04 (2013-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the fourth document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Section

Description

Fixed the known bugs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

About This Document

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the third document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.
Section

Description

Fixed the known bugs.

Updates in Issue 02 (2012-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the second document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.
Section

Description

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on


the Packet Plane

Added an example of configuring E-LAN


services in end-to-end mode.

Fixed the known bugs.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R003C03


This is the first document issue for the V100R003C03 product version.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Configuration Preparations.........................................................................................................1
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools.....................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions...............................................................................................................................2

2 U2000 Quick Start..........................................................................................................................3


3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure..................................................................................4
4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples....................................................8
4.1 Common Network Scenario of the TDM Radio Network..............................................................................................9
4.2 Common Network Scenario of the IP Radio Network.................................................................................................12

5 Configuring the Network Topology........................................................................................17


5.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................................................................................................18
5.1.1 DCN...........................................................................................................................................................................18
5.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE...................................................................................................................................................19
5.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address.........................................................................................................................................19
5.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards.........................................................................................................................20
5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types......................................................................................................................................................21
5.1.6 Subnet........................................................................................................................................................................22
5.2 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................................................22
5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network Topology)...............................................................................28
5.3.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................28
5.3.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................29
5.3.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................30
5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network Topology).................................................................................33
5.4.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................33
5.4.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................34
5.4.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................35
5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network).............................................................................................37
5.5.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................37
5.5.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................38
5.5.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................38
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network)...............................................................................................40


5.6.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................40
5.6.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................41
5.6.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................42
5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network)...................................................................................................................44
5.7.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................44
5.7.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................46
5.7.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................47

6 Configuring Radio Links...........................................................................................................51


6.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................................................................................................52
6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation.................................................................................................................................................52
6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC........................................................................................................................................................53
6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes...........................................................................................................................................54
6.1.4 PLA............................................................................................................................................................................55
6.2 Configuration Procedure...............................................................................................................................................56
6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network)................................................................67
6.3.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................67
6.3.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................69
6.3.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................72
6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network)..................................................................78
6.4.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................78
6.4.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................80
6.4.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................83
6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network)..............................................................86
6.5.1 Networking Diagram.................................................................................................................................................86
6.5.2 Service Planning........................................................................................................................................................89
6.5.3 Configuration Process................................................................................................................................................93
6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network)..............................................................100
6.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................100
6.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................103
6.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................107
6.7 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Packet Network)..................................................................................111
6.7.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................111
6.7.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................114
6.7.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................116

7 Configuring TDM Services.....................................................................................................121


7.1 Basic Concepts...........................................................................................................................................................122
7.1.1 Protection Modes for TDM Services.......................................................................................................................122
7.1.2 Timeslots for TDM Services on IF Boards.............................................................................................................124
7.1.3 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots ...............................................................................................................125
7.1.4 TDM Timeslot Planning Schemes...........................................................................................................................126
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

7.2 Configuration Procedure on a Per-NE Basis..............................................................................................................129


7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain Network)..............................................................133
7.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................133
7.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................136
7.3.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)............................................................................................................137
7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring Network)................................................................141
7.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................141
7.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................143
7.4.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)............................................................................................................145
7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain Network)...........................................................149
7.5.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................149
7.5.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................151
7.5.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)............................................................................................................152
7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring Network).............................................................155
7.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................155
7.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................157
7.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................158

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane..............................................162


8.1 Basic Concepts...........................................................................................................................................................164
8.1.1 What's the Packet Plane...........................................................................................................................................164
8.1.2 Ethernet Port Numbers............................................................................................................................................165
8.1.3 Auto-Negotiation.....................................................................................................................................................166
8.1.4 Flow Control Function.............................................................................................................................................167
8.1.5 Native Ethernet Service Types Based on the Packet Plane.....................................................................................168
8.1.5.1 Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service...................................................................................169
8.1.5.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services..............................................................................................................................170
8.1.5.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services................................................................................................................................171
8.1.5.4 8021D Bridge-based E-LAN Services.................................................................................................................175
8.1.5.5 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services................................................................................................................176
8.1.5.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services................................................................................................................177
8.1.6 Typical Mobile Carrier Network Topologies for Ethernet Services.......................................................................179
8.1.6.1 Networking of VLAN-Based E-Line Services.....................................................................................................179
8.1.6.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services...............................................................................180
8.1.6.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services...............................................................................181
8.1.6.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes...........................................................................................182
8.1.7 MAC Address Table Management..........................................................................................................................186
8.1.8 VLAN Forwarding Table for E-Line Services........................................................................................................186
8.1.9 Split Horizon Group................................................................................................................................................187
8.1.10 Protection for Native Ethernet Services................................................................................................................188
8.2 Configuration Procedure.............................................................................................................................................191
8.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services).....................191
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.2.2 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based E-Line Services).................................................................198


8.2.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based E-Line Services)....................................................................206
8.2.4 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-based E-LAN Services)............................................213
8.2.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)............................................218
8.2.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services)..........................................223
8.2.7 Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services).........................................228
8.2.8 Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based E-Line Services).....................................................................................235
8.2.9 Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based E-Line Services).......................................................................................243
8.2.10 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services).............................................................250
8.2.11 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services).............................................................258
8.2.12 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based E-LAN Services)...........................................................266
8.3 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services)..............................................274
8.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................274
8.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................275
8.3.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................275
8.3.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................276
8.3.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................277
8.3.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................277
8.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................279
8.3.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................279
8.3.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................279
8.3.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................280
8.3.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................280
8.3.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................281
8.3.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................283
8.4 Configuration Example (VLAN-Based E-Line Service)............................................................................................285
8.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................285
8.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................287
8.4.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................287
8.4.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................290
8.4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................290
8.4.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................293
8.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................295
8.4.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................295
8.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................299
8.4.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................299
8.4.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................301
8.4.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................304
8.4.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................308
8.4.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................308
8.4.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................312
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.4.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................312


8.4.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................314
8.4.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................318
8.5 Configuration Example (QinQ-Based E-Line Service)..............................................................................................322
8.5.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................322
8.5.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................325
8.5.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................325
8.5.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................329
8.5.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................329
8.5.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................333
8.5.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................335
8.5.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................335
8.5.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................340
8.5.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................340
8.5.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................342
8.5.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................346
8.5.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................350
8.5.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................350
8.5.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................354
8.5.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................355
8.5.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................359
8.5.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................363
8.6 Configuration Example (802.1d-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)...............................................................................367
8.6.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................368
8.6.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................370
8.6.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................370
8.6.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................373
8.6.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................374
8.6.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................375
8.6.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................377
8.6.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................377
8.6.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................377
8.6.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................380
8.6.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................382
8.6.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................385
8.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................388
8.6.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................388
8.6.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................391
8.6.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................391
8.6.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................393
8.6.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................397
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.7 Configuration Example (802.1q-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)...............................................................................399


8.7.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................399
8.7.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................402
8.7.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................402
8.7.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................406
8.7.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................406
8.7.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................407
8.7.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................409
8.7.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................409
8.7.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................409
8.7.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................411
8.7.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................414
8.7.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................418
8.7.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................421
8.7.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................421
8.7.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................427
8.7.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................428
8.7.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................430
8.7.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................434
8.8 Configuration Example (802.1ad-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service).............................................................................438
8.8.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................438
8.8.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................441
8.8.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................441
8.8.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................445
8.8.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................445
8.8.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................446
8.8.3 End-to-End Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................448
8.8.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................448
8.8.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................449
8.8.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................451
8.8.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................453
8.8.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................456
8.8.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.................................................................................................................................460
8.8.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................460
8.8.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................464
8.8.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................465
8.8.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................468
8.8.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................471
8.9 Configuration Example (Hybrid Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN Services).......................................474
8.9.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................475
8.9.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................477
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

8.9.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................477


8.9.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................481
8.9.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................481
8.9.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................483
8.9.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................485
8.9.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................485
8.9.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................489
8.9.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information).......................................................................................................489
8.9.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................492
8.9.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................495

9 Configuring EoS/EoPDH-Based Ethernet Services.............................................................500


9.1 Basic Concepts...........................................................................................................................................................501
9.1.1 What's the EoS Plane...............................................................................................................................................501
9.1.2 What's the EoPDH Plane.........................................................................................................................................502
9.1.3 VCTRUNK..............................................................................................................................................................502
9.1.4 Hub/Spoke...............................................................................................................................................................503
9.1.5 EoS/EoPDH-Based Ethernet Services.....................................................................................................................503
9.1.5.1 Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted EPL Services.....................................................................................503
9.1.5.2 VLAN-based EVPL Services...............................................................................................................................504
9.1.5.3 QinQ-based EVPL Services.................................................................................................................................506
9.1.5.4 802.1D Bridge-based EPLAN Services................................................................................................................509
9.1.5.5 802.1Q Bridge-based EVPLAN Services.............................................................................................................510
9.1.5.6 802.1ad Bridge-based EVPLAN Services............................................................................................................512
9.2 Configuration Procedure.............................................................................................................................................513
9.2.1 Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted EPL Services).............................................513
9.2.2 Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based EVPL Services)......................................................................................520
9.2.3 Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based EVPL Services)........................................................................................526
9.2.4 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based EPLAN Services)..............................................................532
9.2.5 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services)...........................................................538
9.2.6 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services).........................................................545
9.3 Configuration Example (Ethernet Services Based on TDM Radio)...........................................................................552
9.3.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................553
9.3.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................555
9.3.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports).........................................................................................................................555
9.3.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................................................558
9.3.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)...................................................................................................................559
9.3.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Service Cross-Connections).....................................................................................560
9.3.2.5 Service Planning (QoS)........................................................................................................................................563
9.3.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................563
9.3.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)................................................................................................................563
9.3.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)........................................................................................................566
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

9.3.3.3 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services)...........................................................................................................567


9.3.3.4 Configuration Process (Cross-Connections) .......................................................................................................568
9.3.3.5 Configuration Process (QoS)................................................................................................................................570
9.3.3.6 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................570
9.4 Configuration Example (Ethernet Services Traversing a TDM Network).................................................................572
9.4.1 Networking Diagram...............................................................................................................................................572
9.4.2 Service Planning......................................................................................................................................................575
9.4.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports on the Packet Plane)........................................................................................575
9.4.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane)...................................................................................576
9.4.2.3 Service Planning (QoS on the Packet Plane)........................................................................................................576
9.4.2.4 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports on the EFP8 Board).........................................................................................578
9.4.2.5 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection for the EFP8 Board)................................................................................580
9.4.2.6 Service Planning (Ethernet Services on the EFP8 Board)....................................................................................581
9.4.2.7 Service Planning (Cross-Connections).................................................................................................................582
9.4.2.8 Service Planning (QoS of the EFP8 Board).........................................................................................................583
9.4.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................586
9.4.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports on the Packet Plane) ...............................................................................586
9.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane) .........................................................................587
9.4.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS on the Packet Plane)...............................................................................................587
9.4.3.4 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports on the EFP8 Board).................................................................................590
9.4.3.5 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection on the EFP8 Board)........................................................................592
9.4.3.6 Configuration Process (Ethernet Services on the EFP8 Board)...........................................................................593
9.4.3.7 Configuration Process (Cross-Connections) .......................................................................................................594
9.4.3.8 Configuration Process (QoS on the EFP8 Board)................................................................................................595
9.4.3.9 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...................................................................598

10 Configuring MPLS Tunnels..................................................................................................601


10.1 Basic Concept...........................................................................................................................................................602
10.1.1 MPLS Network Architecture.................................................................................................................................602
10.1.2 LSP........................................................................................................................................................................602
10.1.3 Protection for MPLS Tunnels................................................................................................................................605
10.2 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................606
10.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure....................................................................................................................606
10.2.2 Configuration Procedure (on a Per-NE Basis)......................................................................................................616
10.3 Configuration Example (MPLS Tunnels with MPLS APS Protection)...................................................................626
10.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................626
10.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................627
10.3.2.1 Service Planning (MPLS Ports)..........................................................................................................................627
10.3.2.2 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnel).......................................................................................................................630
10.3.2.3 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnel APS)..............................................................................................................631
10.3.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................635
10.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure....................................................................................................................637
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

10.3.3.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................637


10.3.3.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................639
10.3.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................642
10.3.3.4 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................644
10.3.4 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................................................................645
10.3.4.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................645
10.3.4.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnel)..............................................................................................................648
10.3.4.3 Configuration Process (MPLS APS)..................................................................................................................655
10.3.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................659
10.3.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................661
10.4 Configuration Example (MPLS Tunnels with No Protection).................................................................................662
10.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................662
10.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................663
10.4.2.1 Service Planning (MPLS Ports)..........................................................................................................................663
10.4.2.2 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnels).....................................................................................................................665
10.4.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................666
10.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................668
10.4.3.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................668
10.4.3.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................670
10.4.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................671
10.4.3.4 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................673
10.4.4 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................................................................674
10.4.4.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................675
10.4.4.2 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................676
10.4.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................679
10.4.4.4 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................681
10.5 Configuration Example (MPLS Tunnels Traversing L2 Networks)........................................................................682
10.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................682
10.5.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................684
10.5.2.1 Service Planning (MPLS Ports)..........................................................................................................................684
10.5.2.2 Service Planning (VLAN Sub-Interfaces)..........................................................................................................685
10.5.2.3 Service Planning (MPLS Tunnels).....................................................................................................................687
10.5.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................688
10.5.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)..........................................................................................................690
10.5.3.1 Configuration Process (MPLS Ports).................................................................................................................690
10.5.3.2 Configuration Process (VLAN Sub-Interfaces).................................................................................................693
10.5.3.3 Configuration Process (MPLS Tunnels).............................................................................................................694
10.5.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................699
10.5.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Configured MPLS Tunnels).........................................................................701

11 Configuring PWE3 Services..................................................................................................704


11.1 Basic Concept...........................................................................................................................................................706
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

11.1.1 Types of PWE3 Services.......................................................................................................................................706


11.1.1.1 CES Services......................................................................................................................................................706
11.1.1.2 ATM/IMA Services............................................................................................................................................708
11.1.1.3 PW-Carried E-Line Services..............................................................................................................................709
11.1.1.4 PW-Carried E-AGGR Services..........................................................................................................................712
11.1.2 MS-PW..................................................................................................................................................................715
11.2 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................717
11.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (CES Services)..........................................................................................717
11.2.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (CES Services).................................................................................................720
11.2.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (ATM Services).........................................................................................723
11.2.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (ATM Services)................................................................................................728
11.2.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (E-Line Services Carried by PWs)............................................................735
11.2.6 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (E-Line Services Carried by PWs)...................................................................742
11.2.7 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (PW-Carried E-AGGR Services).....................................................................749
11.3 Configuration Example (Common CES Services)...................................................................................................757
11.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................757
11.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................759
11.3.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................759
11.3.2.2 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................759
11.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................761
11.3.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................761
11.3.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................762
11.3.3.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................764
11.3.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................764
11.3.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................764
11.3.4.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................765
11.3.4.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................767
11.4 Configuration Example (Fractional CES Services)..................................................................................................768
11.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................768
11.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................769
11.4.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................769
11.4.2.2 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................770
11.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................772
11.4.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................772
11.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................773
11.4.3.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................774
11.4.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................774
11.4.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................774
11.4.4.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................775
11.4.4.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................778
11.5 Configuration Example (MS-PW-based CES Services)..........................................................................................778
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

11.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................778


11.5.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................779
11.5.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................780
11.5.2.2 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................780
11.5.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................782
11.5.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................782
11.5.3.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................783
11.5.3.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................784
11.5.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................784
11.5.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................785
11.5.4.2 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................786
11.5.4.3 Configuration Process (Verifying CES Service Configurations).......................................................................789
11.6 Configuration Example (Common ATM Services)..................................................................................................789
11.6.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................790
11.6.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................791
11.6.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................791
11.6.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................792
11.6.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................794
11.6.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................796
11.6.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................799
11.6.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................799
11.6.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................800
11.6.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS Information)..........................................................................................................802
11.6.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................803
11.6.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................805
11.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................805
11.6.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................805
11.6.4.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................806
11.6.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................808
11.6.4.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................810
11.6.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................815
11.7 Configuration Example (Fractional ATM Services)................................................................................................815
11.7.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................815
11.7.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................817
11.7.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................817
11.7.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................818
11.7.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................819
11.7.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................821
11.7.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................823
11.7.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................823
11.7.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................825
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

11.7.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS Information)..........................................................................................................827


11.7.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................828
11.7.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................830
11.7.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................830
11.7.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................830
11.7.4.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................832
11.7.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................834
11.7.4.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................835
11.7.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................841
11.8 Configuration Example (ATM Services on MS-PWs).............................................................................................841
11.8.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................841
11.8.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................842
11.8.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................842
11.8.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................843
11.8.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................844
11.8.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................846
11.8.3 End-to-End Configuration Process........................................................................................................................852
11.8.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................852
11.8.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................853
11.8.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS Information)..........................................................................................................855
11.8.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................856
11.8.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................858
11.8.4 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................858
11.8.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................858
11.8.4.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................859
11.8.4.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................861
11.8.4.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................862
11.8.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................872
11.9 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted ATM Services)......................................................................872
11.9.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................872
11.9.2 ServicePlanning.....................................................................................................................................................873
11.9.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports).............................................................................................................................873
11.9.2.2 Service Planning (ATM/IMA Information).......................................................................................................874
11.9.2.3 Service Planning (QoS)......................................................................................................................................875
11.9.2.4 Service Planning (Service Information).............................................................................................................876
11.9.3 Per-NE Configuration Process...............................................................................................................................878
11.9.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports).....................................................................................................................878
11.9.3.2 Configuration Process (IMA Information).........................................................................................................879
11.9.3.3 Configuration Process (QoS)..............................................................................................................................881
11.9.3.4 Configuration Process (Service Information).....................................................................................................882
11.9.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying ATM Service Configurations).....................................................................886
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

11.10 Configuration Example (E-Line Services Carried on PWs, a Simple Example)...................................................886


11.10.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................886
11.10.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................888
11.10.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................888
11.10.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................889
11.10.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................889
11.10.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................891
11.10.3 End-to-End Configuration Process......................................................................................................................892
11.10.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................892
11.10.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................894
11.10.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................894
11.10.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................896
11.10.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................897
11.10.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................900
11.10.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................900
11.10.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................901
11.10.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................902
11.10.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................904
11.10.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................906
11.11 Configuration Example (E-Line Services Carried on PWs and Transmitting the Ethernet Services Aggregated from
the Hybrid Microwave Network).....................................................................................................................................908
11.11.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................908
11.11.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................910
11.11.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................910
11.11.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................911
11.11.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................912
11.11.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................913
11.11.3 End-to-End Configuration Process......................................................................................................................915
11.11.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................915
11.11.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................916
11.11.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................917
11.11.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................919
11.11.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................920
11.11.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................923
11.11.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................923
11.11.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................925
11.11.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................925
11.11.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................929
11.11.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................931
11.12 Configuration Example (E-Line Services Carried on MS-PWs)............................................................................933
11.12.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................933
11.12.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................935
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

11.12.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................935


11.12.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................936
11.12.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................936
11.12.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................939
11.12.3 End-to-End Configuration Process......................................................................................................................940
11.12.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................940
11.12.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................941
11.12.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................942
11.12.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................943
11.12.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................945
11.12.4 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................947
11.12.4.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................947
11.12.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................949
11.12.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................949
11.12.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)............................................................................................................................952
11.12.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................954
11.13 Configuration Example (PW-Carried E-AGGR Services).....................................................................................956
11.13.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................956
11.13.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................958
11.13.2.1 Service Planning (UNI Ports)...........................................................................................................................958
11.13.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)............................................................................................................960
11.13.2.3 Service Planning (Service Information)...........................................................................................................960
11.13.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)....................................................................................................................................963
11.13.3 Per-NE Configuration Process.............................................................................................................................964
11.13.3.1 Configuration Process (UNI Ports)...................................................................................................................965
11.13.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)....................................................................................................966
11.13.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)...................................................................................................967
11.13.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS Information)........................................................................................................971
11.13.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)...............................................................973

12 Configuring the Clock............................................................................................................976


12.1 Basic Concepts.........................................................................................................................................................977
12.1.1 Clock Source..........................................................................................................................................................977
12.1.2 Clock Protection Modes........................................................................................................................................977
12.1.3 Clock Synchronization Policy...............................................................................................................................981
12.2 Configuration Procedure...........................................................................................................................................988
12.3 Configuration Example (Clock for a TDM Radio Chain Network).........................................................................991
12.3.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................991
12.3.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................993
12.3.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................993
12.4 Configuration Example (Clock for a TDM Radio Ring Network)...........................................................................994
12.4.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................994
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xviii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

12.4.2 Service Planning....................................................................................................................................................996


12.4.3 Configuration Process............................................................................................................................................997
12.5 Configuration Example (Clock for a Hybrid Radio Chain Network).......................................................................998
12.5.1 Networking Diagram.............................................................................................................................................998
12.5.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1000
12.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1001
12.6 Configuration Example (Clock for a Hybrid Radio Ring Network)......................................................................1001
12.6.1 Network Diagram ...............................................................................................................................................1001
12.6.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1003
12.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1004
12.7 Configuration Example (Clocks for a PSN)...........................................................................................................1005
12.7.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1005
12.7.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1007
12.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1009
12.8 Configuration Example (Clocks Across a Third-party TDM Network).................................................................1010
12.8.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1010
12.8.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1011
12.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1012

13 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and Functions.....................................................................1014


13.1 Auxiliary Ports and Functions................................................................................................................................1016
13.2 Environment Monitoring Functions.......................................................................................................................1018
13.3 Configuration Procedure (Monitoring the Outdoor Cabinet).................................................................................1020
13.4 Configuration Example (Orderwire)......................................................................................................................1023
13.4.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1023
13.4.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1025
13.4.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1026
13.5 Configuration Example (Synchronous Data Services)...........................................................................................1027
13.5.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1027
13.5.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1029
13.5.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1029
13.6 Configuration Example (Asynchronous Data Services).........................................................................................1030
13.6.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1030
13.6.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1032
13.6.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1032
13.7 Configuration Example (Wayside E1 Services).....................................................................................................1033
13.7.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1033
13.7.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1033
13.7.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1034
13.8 Configuration Example (External Alarms).............................................................................................................1034
13.8.1 Networking Diagram...........................................................................................................................................1034
13.8.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1035
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

13.8.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1036


13.9 Configuration Example (Monitoring the Outdoor Cabinet)...................................................................................1037
13.9.1 Network Diagram................................................................................................................................................1037
13.9.2 Service Planning..................................................................................................................................................1038
13.9.3 Configuration Process..........................................................................................................................................1038

14 Adding and Modifying Configuration Data....................................................................1040


14.1 Common Task Collection (Network Topology).....................................................................................................1041
14.2 Common Task Collection (Radio Links)................................................................................................................1042
14.3 Common Task Collection (TDM Services)............................................................................................................1047
14.4 Common Task Collection (Packet-Plane Ethernet Services).................................................................................1048
14.5 Task Collection (EoS/EoPDH-Plane Ethernet Services)........................................................................................1051

A Task Collection.......................................................................................................................1053
A.1 U2000 Quick Start...................................................................................................................................................1055
A.1.1 Logging in to a U2000 Client...............................................................................................................................1055
A.1.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client.............................................................................................................................1055
A.1.3 Using Online Help................................................................................................................................................1056
A.1.4 Navigating to Common Views.............................................................................................................................1056
A.1.4.1 Navigating to the Main Topology......................................................................................................................1056
A.1.4.2 Navigating to the NE Explorer..........................................................................................................................1057
A.1.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel...............................................................................................................................1059
A.2 Network Management.............................................................................................................................................1059
A.2.1 Managing NEs......................................................................................................................................................1059
A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method.......................................................................................................1059
A.2.1.2 Creating NEs by Using the Manual Method......................................................................................................1062
A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board..........................................................................................................................1063
A.2.1.4 Configuring an SFP Port....................................................................................................................................1064
A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID..........................................................................................................................................1066
A.2.1.6 Changing the NE Name.....................................................................................................................................1067
A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time..............................................................................................................................1067
A.2.1.8 Localizing the NE Time.....................................................................................................................................1070
A.2.1.9 Configuring Standard NTP Keys.......................................................................................................................1071
A.2.2 Configuring the NE Data......................................................................................................................................1072
A.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data......................................................................................................................................1072
A.2.2.2 Synchronizing NE Data.....................................................................................................................................1073
A.2.3 Configuring the Performance Monitoring Status of NEs.....................................................................................1074
A.2.4 Suppressing Alarms for Monitored Objects.........................................................................................................1075
A.2.5 Connecting Fibers or Cables.................................................................................................................................1076
A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method.......................................................................................1076
A.2.5.2 Creating Fibers Manually..................................................................................................................................1077
A.2.5.3 Creating an Extended ECC................................................................................................................................1077
A.2.5.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection......................................................................................................1078
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xx

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.2.6 Managing Subnets................................................................................................................................................1079


A.2.6.1 Creating a Subnet...............................................................................................................................................1079
A.2.6.2 Copying Topology Objects................................................................................................................................1081
A.2.6.3 Moving Topology Objects.................................................................................................................................1081
A.2.7 Managing Communication...................................................................................................................................1081
A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters............................................................................................................1082
A.2.7.2 Configuring DCCs.............................................................................................................................................1083
A.2.7.3 Configuring DCC Transparent Transmission....................................................................................................1084
A.2.7.4 Configuring the VLAN ID and Bandwidth Used by an Inband DCN...............................................................1085
A.2.7.5 Configuring the Priority of Inband DCN Packets..............................................................................................1086
A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN...................................................................................................................1086
A.2.7.7 Configuring Access Control..............................................................................................................................1087
A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication....................................................................................................1088
A.2.7.9 Creating Static IP Routes...................................................................................................................................1090
A.2.7.10 Setting OSPF Protocol Parameters..................................................................................................................1091
A.2.7.11 Creating an OSPF Area...................................................................................................................................1092
A.2.7.12 Configuring the Network Information of an ABR..........................................................................................1093
A.2.7.13 Creating a Manual Route Aggregation Group.................................................................................................1094
A.2.7.14 Configuring Interface IP Addresses of an ABR..............................................................................................1095
A.2.7.15 Configuring the OSPF Authentication Type...................................................................................................1096
A.2.7.16 Enabling the Proxy ARP..................................................................................................................................1097
A.2.7.17 Configuring the CLNS Role............................................................................................................................1098
A.2.7.18 Configuring the OSI Tunnel............................................................................................................................1098
A.2.7.19 Configuring OSI Port Parameters....................................................................................................................1099
A.2.7.20 Enabling/Disabling the RSTP Protocol When the L2 DCN Solution Is Used................................................1100
A.2.7.21 Querying ECC Routes.....................................................................................................................................1101
A.2.7.22 Querying IP Routes..........................................................................................................................................1101
A.2.7.23 Querying OSI Routes.......................................................................................................................................1102
A.2.7.24 Verifying Connectivity of an ECC Network...................................................................................................1102
A.2.7.25 Verifying Connectivity of an IP DCN Network..............................................................................................1103
A.2.7.26 Configuring the Active and Standby Gateway NEs........................................................................................1103
A.2.8 Configuring the Network Management Port and LCT Access to an NE..............................................................1104
A.2.8.1 Configuring the Ethernet Network Management Port on an NE.......................................................................1104
A.2.8.2 Configuring the Network Management Serial Port on an NE...........................................................................1105
A.2.8.3 Configuring LCT Access to NEs.......................................................................................................................1106
A.2.9 Configuring an NE User.......................................................................................................................................1107
A.2.9.1 Creating an NE User..........................................................................................................................................1107
A.2.9.2 Changing the Password of an NE User..............................................................................................................1108
A.2.9.3 Setting Warning Screen Parameters..................................................................................................................1109
A.2.9.4 Switching NE Users...........................................................................................................................................1110
A.2.10 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication........................................................................................................1111
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.2.10.1 Configuring SSL Protocol Communication Between a U2000 Server and its Clients....................................1111
A.2.10.2 Configuring the Connection Mode Between a U2000 Client and Its Gateway NE........................................1112
A.2.11 Configuring RADIUS Authentication................................................................................................................1114
A.2.11.1 Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function.....................................................................................................1114
A.2.11.2 Creating a RADIUS Server or a RADIUS Proxy Server................................................................................1115
A.2.11.3 Configuring RADIUS Server Parameters........................................................................................................1116
A.3 Managing Radio Links............................................................................................................................................1118
A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group...................................................................................................................1118
A.3.2 Creating an XPIC Workgroup..............................................................................................................................1120
A.3.3 Setting the AM Attributes of the XPIC Workgroup.............................................................................................1121
A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link........................................................................................1123
A.3.5 Configuring a Single-Hop Radio Link.................................................................................................................1125
A.3.6 Creating an N+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................................1128
A.3.7 Querying the IF 1+1 Protection Status.................................................................................................................1129
A.3.8 Querying the IF N+1 Protection Status................................................................................................................1130
A.3.9 IF 1+1 Protection Switching.................................................................................................................................1130
A.3.10 IF N+1 Protection Switching..............................................................................................................................1131
A.3.11 Starting/Stopping the N+1 Protection Protocol..................................................................................................1131
A.3.12 Creating a PLA Group........................................................................................................................................1132
A.3.13 Querying the Status of a PLA Group..................................................................................................................1134
A.4 Managing the MSP..................................................................................................................................................1135
A.4.1 Configuring Linear MSP......................................................................................................................................1135
A.4.2 Querying the Status of the Linear MSP................................................................................................................1136
A.4.3 Performing Linear MSP Switching......................................................................................................................1137
A.4.4 Starting/Stopping the Linear MSP Protocol.........................................................................................................1138
A.5 Managing TDM Services.........................................................................................................................................1139
A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services.................................................................................1139
A.5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services...................................................................................................1140
A.5.3 Modifying the Priorities of E1 Services...............................................................................................................1141
A.5.4 Inserting E1_AIS upon a TU_AIS Condition.......................................................................................................1142
A.5.5 Configuring the Automatic Switching of SNCP Services....................................................................................1143
A.5.6 Deleting Cross-Connections.................................................................................................................................1144
A.5.7 Converting a Normal Service into an SNCP Service...........................................................................................1145
A.5.8 Converting an SNCP Service to a Normal Service..............................................................................................1146
A.5.9 Querying TDM Services.......................................................................................................................................1147
A.5.10 Switching SNCP Services...................................................................................................................................1147
A.5.11 Querying the Protection Status of SNCP Services.............................................................................................1148
A.6 Managing Ports........................................................................................................................................................1148
A.6.1 Setting the Parameters of SDH Ports....................................................................................................................1149
A.6.2 Setting Working Modes of E1 Ports.....................................................................................................................1150
A.6.3 Setting the Parameters of PDH Ports....................................................................................................................1150
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.6.4 Configuring Overhead Bytes................................................................................................................................1151


A.6.4.1 Configuring RSOHs...........................................................................................................................................1151
A.6.4.2 Configuring VC-4 POHs...................................................................................................................................1152
A.6.4.3 Configuring VC-12 POHs.................................................................................................................................1153
A.6.5 Setting Smart E1 Port Parameters.........................................................................................................................1155
A.6.5.1 Setting Basic Attributes of Smart E1 Ports........................................................................................................1155
A.6.5.2 Setting Advanced Attributes of Smart E1 Ports................................................................................................1156
A.6.6 Setting Serial Port Parameters..............................................................................................................................1157
A.6.6.1 Creating Serial Ports..........................................................................................................................................1157
A.6.6.2 Setting Basic Attributes of Serial Ports.............................................................................................................1158
A.6.7 Setting Ethernet Port Parameters..........................................................................................................................1159
A.6.7.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports...................................................................................................1159
A.6.7.2 Configuring the Traffic Control of Ethernet Ports............................................................................................1160
A.6.7.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports................................................................................................1161
A.6.7.4 Setting Layer 3 Attributes of Ethernet Ports......................................................................................................1163
A.6.7.5 Setting the Advanced Attributes of Ethernet Ports............................................................................................1163
A.6.8 Setting IF_ETH Port Parameters..........................................................................................................................1164
A.6.8.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports...................................................................................................1164
A.6.8.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports................................................................................................1165
A.6.8.3 Setting Layer 3 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports......................................................................................................1166
A.6.8.4 Setting the Advanced Attributes of IF_ETH Ports............................................................................................1167
A.6.9 Setting IF Port Parameters....................................................................................................................................1167
A.6.9.1 Setting IF Attributes..........................................................................................................................................1167
A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes............................................................................................................................1169
A.6.9.3 Setting Advanced AM Attributes......................................................................................................................1170
A.6.9.4 Querying the AM Status....................................................................................................................................1171
A.6.9.5 Querying ATPC Adjustment Records...............................................................................................................1172
A.6.9.6 Modifying the Hybrid/AM Attributes...............................................................................................................1172
A.6.10 Setting ODU Port Parameters.............................................................................................................................1175
A.6.10.1 Setting ODU Transmit Frequency Attributes..................................................................................................1175
A.6.10.2 Querying ODU Information............................................................................................................................1176
A.6.10.3 Setting ODU Power Attributes........................................................................................................................1177
A.6.10.4 Setting ODU Advanced Attributes..................................................................................................................1177
A.6.10.5 Setting the ODU Transmitter State..................................................................................................................1178
A.6.10.6 Querying the Historical Transmit Power and Receive Power.........................................................................1179
A.6.10.7 Querying the SNR Values of a Radio Link.....................................................................................................1180
A.6.11 Creating VLAN Sub-Interfaces..........................................................................................................................1180
A.7 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the Packet Plane...........................................................................1181
A.7.1 Managing ERPS....................................................................................................................................................1181
A.7.1.1 Creating Ethernet Ring Protection Instances.....................................................................................................1182
A.7.1.2 Setting the Parameters of Ethernet Ring Protocol.............................................................................................1183
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.7.1.3 Querying the Status of the Ethernet Ring Protocol...........................................................................................1183


A.7.2 Managing the LAG...............................................................................................................................................1184
A.7.2.1 Creating a LAG..................................................................................................................................................1184
A.7.2.2 Setting LAG Parameters....................................................................................................................................1186
A.7.2.3 Querying the Protocol Information of the LAG................................................................................................1187
A.7.3 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................................1188
A.7.3.1 Configuring the QinQ Link...............................................................................................................................1188
A.7.3.2 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services.............................................................................................................1189
A.7.3.3 Configuring NNI-NNI E-Line Services (Carried by QinQ Links)....................................................................1190
A.7.3.4 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services (Carried by QinQ Links)....................................................................1191
A.7.3.5 Configuring UNI-NNI E-Line Services (Carried by PWs)...............................................................................1192
A.7.3.6 Creating E-AGGR Services...............................................................................................................................1194
A.7.3.7 Creating a VLAN Forwarding Table for an E-Line Service.............................................................................1197
A.7.3.8 Configuring TPID for a Request VLAN...........................................................................................................1198
A.7.3.9 Configuring IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services................................................................................1199
A.7.3.10 Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services..............................................................................1200
A.7.3.11 Configuring IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based E-LAN Services............................................................................1201
A.7.3.12 Changing Logical Ports Connected to a VB....................................................................................................1203
A.7.3.13 Deleting an E-Line Service..............................................................................................................................1204
A.7.3.14 Deleting E-LAN Services................................................................................................................................1204
A.7.4 Managing the MAC Address Table......................................................................................................................1205
A.7.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry...............................................................................................................1205
A.7.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of MAC Addresses..................................................................................................1206
A.7.4.3 Configuring the Aging Parameters of a MAC Address Table...........................................................................1207
A.7.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address..............................................................................................1207
A.7.5 Setting the Mode for Processing an Unknown Frame of the E-LAN Service......................................................1208
A.7.6 Managing the MSTP.............................................................................................................................................1209
A.7.6.1 Creating the MSTP Port Group.........................................................................................................................1209
A.7.6.2 Setting the Bridge Parameters of the MSTP......................................................................................................1210
A.7.6.3 Setting the Parameters of the CIST...................................................................................................................1211
A.7.6.4 Querying the CIST Running Information..........................................................................................................1212
A.7.6.5 Changing the Spanning Tree Protocol Used by the Port Group........................................................................1213
A.7.6.6 Enabling/Disabling the MSTP Protocol............................................................................................................1213
A.7.6.7 Modifying the Configuration Data of the MSTP Port Group............................................................................1214
A.7.7 Managing the QoS................................................................................................................................................1215
A.7.7.1 Creating a DS Domain.......................................................................................................................................1215
A.7.7.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain...............................................................................1217
A.7.7.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their Trusted Packet Types................................................1219
A.7.7.4 Creating a Port Policy........................................................................................................................................1221
A.7.7.5 Modifying the Port Policy.................................................................................................................................1223
A.7.7.6 Creating Traffic.................................................................................................................................................1224
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.7.7.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy.........................................................................................................1225


A.7.7.8 Configuring Port Shaping..................................................................................................................................1227
A.7.7.9 Querying the Port Policy...................................................................................................................................1228
A.7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port..................................................................................................................1229
A.7.8 Using the IEEE 802.1ag OAM.............................................................................................................................1230
A.7.8.1 Creating an MD.................................................................................................................................................1230
A.7.8.2 Creating an MA.................................................................................................................................................1231
A.7.8.3 Creating MEPs...................................................................................................................................................1232
A.7.8.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA.....................................................................................................................1233
A.7.8.5 Creating MIPs....................................................................................................................................................1234
A.7.8.6 Performing a CC Test........................................................................................................................................1235
A.7.8.7 Performing an LB Test......................................................................................................................................1236
A.7.8.8 Performing an LT Test.......................................................................................................................................1237
A.7.8.9 Activating the AIS.............................................................................................................................................1239
A.7.8.10 Monitoring Packet Loss Ratio, Delay, or Delay Variation of Ethernet Services............................................1239
A.7.8.11 E-LAN Service Loopback Detection...............................................................................................................1240
A.7.8.12 Reactivating E-LAN Services..........................................................................................................................1241
A.7.9 Using the IEEE 802.3ah OAM ............................................................................................................................1242
A.7.9.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function...................................................................................................1242
A.7.9.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification ...............................................................................................................1243
A.7.9.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold ................................................................................1243
A.7.9.4 Performing Remote Loopbacks.........................................................................................................................1244
A.7.9.5 Enabling Self-Loop Detection...........................................................................................................................1246
A.7.10 LPT Configuration..............................................................................................................................................1246
A.7.10.1 Configuring Point-to-Point LPT Traversing an L2 Network..........................................................................1246
A.7.10.2 Configuring Point-to-Point LPT Traversing a PSN or QinQ Network...........................................................1247
A.7.10.3 Configuring Point-to-Multipoint LPT.............................................................................................................1248
A.7.10.4 Configuring Simple LPT.................................................................................................................................1249
A.8 Configuring Ethernet Services and Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane.................................................................1250
A.8.1 Managing ERPS....................................................................................................................................................1250
A.8.1.1 Creating ERPS Instances...................................................................................................................................1250
A.8.1.2 Setting the Parameters of the ERPS Protocol....................................................................................................1251
A.8.1.3 Querying the Status of the ERPS Protocol........................................................................................................1252
A.8.2 Managing LAGs ..................................................................................................................................................1252
A.8.2.1 Creating a LAG..................................................................................................................................................1252
A.8.2.2 Setting Parameters for LAGs.............................................................................................................................1254
A.8.2.3 Querying the Protocol Information of LAGs.....................................................................................................1255
A.8.3 Configuring Ethernet Services..............................................................................................................................1256
A.8.3.1 Creating Ethernet Private Line Services............................................................................................................1256
A.8.3.2 Creating Ethernet LAN Services.......................................................................................................................1258
A.8.3.3 Changing the Ports Connected to a VB.............................................................................................................1262
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.8.3.4 Creating the VLAN Filtering Table...................................................................................................................1263


A.8.3.5 Creating QinQ-Based EVPL Services...............................................................................................................1264
A.8.3.6 Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based EVPLAN Services................................................................................1266
A.8.3.7 Deleting an Ethernet Private Line Service.........................................................................................................1269
A.8.3.8 Deleting an Ethernet LAN Service....................................................................................................................1270
A.8.4 Managing the MAC Address Table......................................................................................................................1270
A.8.4.1 Creating a Static MAC Address Entry...............................................................................................................1271
A.8.4.2 Creating a Blacklist Entry of a MAC Address..................................................................................................1271
A.8.4.3 Setting the Aging Time of a MAC Address Table Entry .................................................................................1272
A.8.4.4 Querying or Deleting a Dynamic MAC Address..............................................................................................1273
A.8.4.5 Querying the Actual Capacity of a MAC Address Table..................................................................................1273
A.8.5 Configuring Ethernet Ports...................................................................................................................................1274
A.8.5.1 Configuring External Ethernet Ports.................................................................................................................1274
A.8.5.2 Configuring VCTRUNKs on an Ethernet Board...............................................................................................1276
A.8.5.3 Modifying the Type Field of QinQ Frames.......................................................................................................1278
A.8.5.4 Dynamically Increasing/Decreasing the VCTRUNK Bandwidth.....................................................................1279
A.8.6 Managing the Spanning Tree Protocol.................................................................................................................1280
A.8.6.1 Configuring the Type and Enabled Status of the Spanning Tree Protocol........................................................1280
A.8.6.2 Setting the Parameters of Spanning Tree Protocol............................................................................................1281
A.8.6.3 Querying the Running Information About the Spanning Tree Protocol............................................................1282
A.8.7 Managing the IGMP Snooping Protocol..............................................................................................................1283
A.8.7.1 Configuring the IGMP Snooping Protocol........................................................................................................1283
A.8.7.2 Configuring Static Multicast Entries.................................................................................................................1284
A.8.7.3 Modifying the Aging Time of a Multicast Table Entry.....................................................................................1285
A.8.7.4 Querying the Running Information of the IGMP Snooping Protocol...............................................................1286
A.8.8 Managing the QoS................................................................................................................................................1286
A.8.8.1 Creating a Flow..................................................................................................................................................1287
A.8.8.2 Creating the CAR..............................................................................................................................................1287
A.8.8.3 Creating the CoS................................................................................................................................................1288
A.8.8.4 Binding the CAR/CoS.......................................................................................................................................1290
A.8.8.5 Configuring Traffic Shaping for Egress Queues...............................................................................................1291
A.8.8.6 Configuring Port Shaping..................................................................................................................................1292
A.8.8.7 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies........................................................................................................1292
A.8.9 Using the Ethernet service OAM..........................................................................................................................1293
A.8.9.1 Creating MDs.....................................................................................................................................................1293
A.8.9.2 Creating MAs.....................................................................................................................................................1294
A.8.9.3 Creating MPs.....................................................................................................................................................1295
A.8.9.4 Performing a CC Test........................................................................................................................................1297
A.8.9.5 Performing an LB Test......................................................................................................................................1298
A.8.9.6 Performing an LT Test.......................................................................................................................................1299
A.8.9.7 Activating the AIS.............................................................................................................................................1300
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxvi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.8.9.8 Performing a Ping Test .....................................................................................................................................1301


A.8.9.9 Performing Performance Check........................................................................................................................1302
A.8.10 Using the Ethernet port OAM.............................................................................................................................1302
A.8.10.1 Enabling the OAM Auto-Discovery Function.................................................................................................1302
A.8.10.2 Enabling the Link Event Notification..............................................................................................................1304
A.8.10.3 Modifying the OAM Error Frame Monitoring Threshold...............................................................................1305
A.8.10.4 Performing the Remote Loopback...................................................................................................................1306
A.8.11 Configuring LPT.................................................................................................................................................1306
A.8.11.1 Configuring LPT for Point-to-Point Services..................................................................................................1307
A.8.11.2 Configuring LPT for Point-to-Multipoint Services.........................................................................................1308
A.9 Managing MPLS/PWE3 Services and Features......................................................................................................1309
A.9.1 Managing Address Resolution..............................................................................................................................1309
A.9.1.1 Creating ARP Static Entries..............................................................................................................................1310
A.9.1.2 Querying ARP Entries.......................................................................................................................................1310
A.9.1.3 Converting Dynamic ARP Entries to Static ARP Entries.................................................................................1311
A.9.1.4 Deleting Static ARP Entries..............................................................................................................................1311
A.9.1.5 Setting ARP Aging Time...................................................................................................................................1312
A.9.2 Managing MPLS Tunnels.....................................................................................................................................1312
A.9.2.1 Setting Basic MPLS Attributes..........................................................................................................................1312
A.9.2.2 Creating a Unidirectional MPLS Tunnel...........................................................................................................1313
A.9.2.3 Creating a Bidirectional MPLS Tunnel.............................................................................................................1314
A.9.2.4 Querying MPLS Tunnel Information................................................................................................................1316
A.9.2.5 Changing MPLS Tunnel Information................................................................................................................1316
A.9.2.6 Deleting MPLS Tunnels....................................................................................................................................1317
A.9.2.7 Setting MPLS OAM Parameters.......................................................................................................................1317
A.9.2.8 Enabling/Disabling FDI.....................................................................................................................................1318
A.9.2.9 Starting/Stopping CV/FFD Detection for MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................1319
A.9.2.10 Querying LSP Running Status.........................................................................................................................1320
A.9.2.11 Clearing OAM Configuration Data for MPLS Tunnels..................................................................................1320
A.9.2.12 Performing an LSP Ping Test..........................................................................................................................1321
A.9.2.13 Performing an LSP Traceroute Test................................................................................................................1322
A.9.3 Managing MPLS APS Protection Groups............................................................................................................1323
A.9.3.1 Creating an MPLS APS Protection Group........................................................................................................1323
A.9.3.2 Querying MPLS APS Status..............................................................................................................................1325
A.9.3.3 Triggering MPLS APS Switching.....................................................................................................................1325
A.9.3.4 Enabling/Disabling MPLS APS Protection.......................................................................................................1326
A.9.4 Managing PWs......................................................................................................................................................1327
A.9.4.1 Querying Information and Running Status of PWs...........................................................................................1327
A.9.4.2 Creating an MS-PW...........................................................................................................................................1328
A.9.4.3 Setting PW OAM Parameters............................................................................................................................1330
A.9.4.4 Performing a PW Ping Test...............................................................................................................................1330
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxvii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.9.4.5 Performing a PW Traceroute Test.....................................................................................................................1331


A.9.5 Managing a PW APS Protection Group...............................................................................................................1332
A.9.5.1 Creating a PW APS Protection Group...............................................................................................................1332
A.9.5.2 Configuring Slave Protection Pairs of PW APS................................................................................................1334
A.9.5.3 Querying PW APS Status..................................................................................................................................1336
A.9.5.4 Triggering PW APS Switching..........................................................................................................................1337
A.9.5.5 Enabling/Disabling PW APS Protection...........................................................................................................1338
A.9.6 Managing CES Services.......................................................................................................................................1339
A.9.6.1 Creating CES Services.......................................................................................................................................1339
A.9.6.2 Modifying CES Service Parameters..................................................................................................................1341
A.9.6.3 Querying CES Service Information...................................................................................................................1342
A.9.6.4 Deleting a CES Service.....................................................................................................................................1343
A.9.7 Managing ATM/IMA Ports..................................................................................................................................1343
A.9.7.1 Binding ATM TRUNKs....................................................................................................................................1343
A.9.7.2 Configuring an IMA group ...............................................................................................................................1345
A.9.7.3 Setting ATM Port Parameters............................................................................................................................1345
A.9.7.4 Querying Running Status of an IMA Group......................................................................................................1346
A.9.7.5 Querying Link Running Status of an IMA Group.............................................................................................1347
A.9.8 Managing ATM Services......................................................................................................................................1347
A.9.8.1 Creating ATM Services.....................................................................................................................................1347
A.9.8.2 Modifying ATM Service Parameters.................................................................................................................1350
A.9.8.3 Querying ATM Services....................................................................................................................................1351
A.9.8.4 Deleting an ATM Service..................................................................................................................................1351
A.9.9 ATM Traffic Management...................................................................................................................................1352
A.9.9.1 Creating an ATM-DiffServ Domain..................................................................................................................1352
A.9.9.2 Modifying an ATM-Diffserv Domain...............................................................................................................1353
A.9.9.3 Creating an ATM Policy....................................................................................................................................1354
A.9.9.4 Modifying an ATM Policy................................................................................................................................1355
A.9.10 Using ATM OAM...............................................................................................................................................1356
A.9.10.1 Setting Segment and End Attributes of AIS/RDI............................................................................................1356
A.9.10.2 Performing a Continuity Check Test...............................................................................................................1357
A.9.10.3 Querying or Setting LLIDs..............................................................................................................................1357
A.9.10.4 Performing an LB Test....................................................................................................................................1358
A.10 Managing the Clock...............................................................................................................................................1359
A.10.1 Managing Clocks at the Physical Layer.............................................................................................................1359
A.10.1.1 Configuring the Clock Sources........................................................................................................................1359
A.10.1.2 Configuring Clock Subnets..............................................................................................................................1360
A.10.1.3 User-Defined Clock Quality............................................................................................................................1361
A.10.1.4 Configuring the SSM Output Status................................................................................................................1362
A.10.1.5 Configuring the Clock ID Output Status.........................................................................................................1363
A.10.1.6 Modifying the Parameters of the Clock Output...............................................................................................1364
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxviii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.10.1.7 Configuring Clock Sources for External Clock Output...................................................................................1364


A.10.1.8 Changing the Conditions for Clock Source Switching....................................................................................1365
A.10.1.9 Modifying the Recovery Parameter of the Clock Source................................................................................1366
A.10.1.10 Querying the Clock Synchronization Status..................................................................................................1367
A.10.2 Managing CES ACR Clocks..............................................................................................................................1367
A.10.2.1 Configuring the Primary Clock for an ACR Clock Domain...........................................................................1367
A.10.2.2 Configuring Ports Using the Clock Domain....................................................................................................1368
A.10.3 Managing the IEEE 1588v2 Clock.....................................................................................................................1370
A.10.3.1 Changing the Mode for Selecting the Frequency Source................................................................................1370
A.10.3.2 Querying or Modifying the PTP System Time................................................................................................1371
A.10.3.3 Setting the PTP NE Attributes.........................................................................................................................1371
A.10.3.4 Creating PTP Clock Ports................................................................................................................................1372
A.10.3.5 Setting PTP Clock Port Attributes...................................................................................................................1373
A.10.3.6 Setting Parameters for IEEE 1588v2 Clock Packets.......................................................................................1374
A.10.3.7 Configuring the Cable Transmission Offset Between NEs.............................................................................1374
A.10.3.8 Configuring a PTP Clock Subnet....................................................................................................................1375
A.10.3.9 Modifying the BMC Algorithm Parameters for NE Clocks............................................................................1376
A.10.3.10 Setting Basic Attributes of External Time Ports............................................................................................1376
A.10.3.11 Setting BMC Algorithm Parameters for External Time Ports.......................................................................1377
A.10.3.12 Setting the Cable Transmission Offset for External Time Ports...................................................................1377
A.11 Using the RMON...................................................................................................................................................1378
A.11.1 Browsing the Performance Data in the Statistics Group of a Port......................................................................1378
A.11.2 Configuring an Alarm Group for a Port.............................................................................................................1381
A.11.3 Configuring a Historical Control Group.............................................................................................................1384
A.11.4 Browsing the Performance Data in the Historical Group of a Port....................................................................1385
A.12 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and Functions...........................................................................................................1388
A.12.1 Configuring Orderwire.......................................................................................................................................1388
A.12.2 Configuring the Synchronous Data Service.......................................................................................................1389
A.12.3 Configuring the Asynchronous Data Service.....................................................................................................1390
A.12.4 Configuring the Wayside E1 Service.................................................................................................................1391
A.12.5 Configure External Alarms.................................................................................................................................1392
A.12.6 Monitoring the Outdoor Cabinet........................................................................................................................1393
A.12.6.1 Configuring the Function of an Auxiliary Port ...............................................................................................1393
A.12.6.2 Setting the Type of the Outdoor Cabinet.........................................................................................................1394
A.12.6.3 Querying and Setting the Temperature and Fan Information of the Outdoor Cabinet....................................1395
A.12.6.4 Querying and Setting the Information About the Power System of the Outdoor Cabinet..............................1396
A.12.6.5 Querying the Ambient Temperature and Humidity of the Outdoor Cabinet...................................................1397
A.12.6.6 Setting the Temperature and Humidity Alarm Thresholds for the PMU........................................................1398
A.13 End-to-End Configuration Task Collection...........................................................................................................1399
A.13.1 Configuring Native Ethernet Services (in an End-to-End Mode).......................................................................1399
A.13.1.1 Creating E-Line Services over Native Ethernet...............................................................................................1399
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxix

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

A.13.1.2 Creating E-LAN Services over Native Ethernet..............................................................................................1403


A.13.1.3 Managing E-Line Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode..................................................................1407
A.13.1.4 Managing Discrete Services Transmitted in Native Ethernet Mode...............................................................1407
A.13.1.5 Adjusting an E-LAN Service Network............................................................................................................1408
A.13.2 Searching for MPLS Tunnels and PWE3 Services.............................................................................................1411
A.13.3 Configuring MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.........................................................................................1413
A.13.3.1 Configuring Port IP Address Resources..........................................................................................................1414
A.13.3.2 Creating L2 Links............................................................................................................................................1414
A.13.3.3 Creating Non-Protection MPLS Tunnels (in an End-to-End Mode)...............................................................1415
A.13.3.4 Creating MPLS Tunnels Configured with MPLS APS Protection in an End-to-End Mode...........................1419
A.13.3.5 Verifying MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode..........................................................................................1426
A.13.3.6 Managing MPLS Tunnels in an End-to-End Mode.........................................................................................1427
A.13.3.7 Managing Discrete MPLS Tunnels.................................................................................................................1427
A.13.3.8 Searching for MPLS APS Protection Groups..................................................................................................1428
A.13.3.9 Managing MPLS APS Protection Groups in an End-to-End Mode................................................................1428
A.13.4 Configuring PWE3 Services in an End-to-End Mode........................................................................................1429
A.13.4.1 Creating PWE3 Service Templates.................................................................................................................1429
A.13.4.2 Configuring CES Services in an End-to-End Mode........................................................................................1430
A.13.4.3 Configuring an ATM Policy Profile................................................................................................................1433
A.13.4.4 Configuring an ATM CoS Mapping Profile....................................................................................................1434
A.13.4.5 Configuring ATM Services in an End-to-End Mode......................................................................................1436
A.13.4.6 Configuring PW-Based E-Line Services (in an End-to-End Mode)................................................................1438
A.13.4.7 Verifying PW Configurations in an End-to-End Mode...................................................................................1441
A.13.4.8 Verifying PW-Based E-Line Service Configurations (in an End-to-End Mode)............................................1444
A.13.4.9 Managing and Maintaining PWE3 Services....................................................................................................1446
A.13.4.10 Managing Discrete PWE3 Services...............................................................................................................1447
A.14 Verifying Services and Features............................................................................................................................1447
A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS.......................................................................................................................1447
A.14.2 Testing E1 Services by Using a BER Tester......................................................................................................1449
A.14.3 Testing Ethernet Services...................................................................................................................................1451
A.14.4 Testing ATM Services........................................................................................................................................1456
A.14.5 Testing AM Switching........................................................................................................................................1459
A.14.5.1 Testing AM Switching by Using a BER Tester...............................................................................................1459
A.14.5.2 Testing AM Switching Without a BER Tester................................................................................................1461
A.14.6 Testing Protection Switching..............................................................................................................................1463
A.14.6.1 Testing IF 1+1 Switching................................................................................................................................1463
A.14.6.2 Testing N+1 Protection Switching...................................................................................................................1466
A.14.6.3 Testing SNCP Switching.................................................................................................................................1469
A.14.6.4 Testing ERPS Switching..................................................................................................................................1473
A.14.6.5 Testing MPLS APS Protection Switching.......................................................................................................1475
A.14.6.6 Testing Linear MSP Switching........................................................................................................................1478
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxx

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B Parameters Description..........................................................................................................1483
B.1 Parameters for Network Management.....................................................................................................................1484
B.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................................1484
B.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................................1484
B.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................................1489
B.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................................1491
B.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................................1492
B.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................................1495
B.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management.................................................................................1497
B.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management...................................................................................................1498
B.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs.............................................................1499
B.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management.....................................................................................................1499
B.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting........................................................................1500
B.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................................1501
B.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............................1503
B.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................................1505
B.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.........................................................................................1507
B.1.2.6 Parameter Description: ECC Link Management_Availability Test..................................................................1508
B.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................................1509
B.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation...............................1510
B.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_Availability Test.......................................................1511
B.1.2.10 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................................1512
B.1.2.11 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................................1518
B.1.2.12 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas.......................................................................1519
B.1.2.13 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding OSPF Areas....................................1520
B.1.2.14 Parameter Description: Management of Multiple OSPF Areas_Adding Routes to Be Manually Aggregated
........................................................................................................................................................................................1522
B.1.2.15 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting......................................................................................................1522
B.1.2.16 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................................1523
B.1.2.17 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table..............................................................................1524
B.1.2.18 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................................1525
B.1.2.19 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Port Parameters....................................................................1530
B.1.2.20 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................................1530
B.1.2.21 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting................................................................................1531
B.1.2.22 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control...........................................................................1532
B.1.2.23 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Packet Control...........................................................................1533
B.1.2.24 Parameter Description: L2 DCN Management................................................................................................1534
B.1.2.25 Parameter Description: Access Control...........................................................................................................1535
B.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management....................................................................................................1536
B.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management..................................................................................................1536
B.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation..................................................................................1537
B.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control....................................................................................................1539
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B.1.3.4 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_Creation...............................................................................1540


B.1.3.5 Parameter Description: RADIUS Configuration_RADIUS Server...................................................................1541
B.1.3.6 Parameter Description: Enabling/Disabling the RADIUS Function.................................................................1543
B.2 Radio Link Parameters.............................................................................................................................................1543
B.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation...........................................................1543
B.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC..............................................................................................1548
B.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create....................................................................................................1555
B.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection................................................................................................................1556
B.2.5 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection_Create................................................................................................1558
B.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection............................................................................................................1561
B.2.7 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_Creating a PLA Group...................................................................1565
B.2.8 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_PLA................................................................................................1566
B.2.9 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration......................................................................................1567
B.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters.................................................................................................................1578
B.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation.....................................................................................................1578
B.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP.....................................................................................................................1582
B.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters.................................................................................................................................1586
B.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation............................................................................1586
B.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation....................................................1588
B.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services...........1592
B.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration............................................................................................1596
B.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control....................................................................................................1599
B.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion............................................................................................................1602
B.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces...............................................................................................................................1603
B.5.1 Parameter Description: Working Modes of Ports.................................................................................................1603
B.5.2 PDH Port Parameters............................................................................................................................................1604
B.5.2.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes........................................................................................1604
B.5.2.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes.................................................................................1605
B.5.3 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................................1609
B.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.............................................................................1609
B.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control.................................................................................1614
B.5.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes..........................................................................1616
B.5.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes.................................................................................1620
B.5.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes......................................................................1622
B.5.4 Serial Port Parameters...........................................................................................................................................1624
B.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes.........................................................................................1624
B.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.............................................................................1626
B.5.5 Microwave Interface Parameters..........................................................................................................................1627
B.5.5.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................................1627
B.5.5.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes.....................................................................1628
B.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes.....................................................................1630
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B.5.5.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes.................................................................1632


B.5.6 IF Board Parameters.............................................................................................................................................1636
B.5.6.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..............................................................................................1636
B.5.6.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute.......................................................................................1644
B.5.6.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes.......................................................1646
B.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records..........................................................................................1647
B.5.6.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test....................................................................................................................1648
B.5.7 ODU Parameters...................................................................................................................................................1649
B.5.7.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.................................................................1649
B.5.7.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.................................................................................1651
B.5.7.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information......................................................................1654
B.5.7.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes...........................................................................1656
B.5.8 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards...................................................................................................................1657
B.5.8.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.............................................................................................................1657
B.5.8.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown..........................................................................................1659
B.5.9 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards...................................................................................................................1659
B.5.9.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports....................................................................................................................1660
B.5.9.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test....................................................................................................................1663
B.5.10 Parameters for Overhead.....................................................................................................................................1664
B.5.10.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead...................................................................................1664
B.5.10.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs................................................................................................................1665
B.5.10.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs..............................................................................................................1667
B.5.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Virtual Interfaces............................................................................................1668
B.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane.........................................................1671
B.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................................1671
B.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation..............................................................................................1671
B.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service..............................................................................................................1693
B.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Items for E-Line Services_Creation...................................1704
B.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation.............................................................................................1705
B.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service.............................................................................................................1711
B.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation....................................................................................................1723
B.6.1.7 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services_Creation........................................................................................1724
B.6.1.8 Parameter Description: E-AGGR Services........................................................................................................1731
B.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................................1736
B.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation......................................................................................1736
B.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management......................................................................................................1739
B.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation.................................................................1745
B.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration........................................................1747
B.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters...................................................................1748
B.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters......................................................................1753
B.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST.....................................1755
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxiii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation............................................1765


B.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation............................................................1772
B.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT......................................................................1773
B.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT.......................................................1776
B.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.............................................................1776
B.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT..............................................1780
B.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................................1784
B.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation........................1784
B.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation..................1785
B.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..................................................1786
B.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation....................................1787
B.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation...................................................1788
B.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling....................................................1789
B.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.....................................................1791
B.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling Service Loopback Detection..................................1793
B.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter....................................................1793
B.6.3.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring...........................1795
B.6.4 QoS Parameters.....................................................................................................................................................1797
B.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.....................................................................................1797
B.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create.......................................................................1803
B.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.............................................................1810
B.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management.....................................................................................................1812
B.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy....................................................................................................................1818
B.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration........................................................1825
B.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation...........................................................................1836
B.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoS/EoPDH Plane...............................................1838
B.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services..........................................................................................................................1838
B.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation...................................................................................1838
B.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services.........................1842
B.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service...................................................................................................1846
B.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q
Bridge.............................................................................................................................................................................1848
B.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service
........................................................................................................................................................................................1852
B.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service..................................................................................................1857
B.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation..................................................................................1864
B.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries...............................................................1865
B.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols........................................................................................................................1866
B.7.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation......................................................................................1866
B.7.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management......................................................................................................1869
B.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling...............................................................................1875
B.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters...............................................................................1876
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxiv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters...................................................................................1878


B.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information..............................................................1879
B.7.2.7 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information...................................................................1880
B.7.2.8 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute......................................................................1881
B.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling............................................................................1882
B.7.2.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries......................1884
B.7.2.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries..........................1884
B.7.2.12 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs..........................................................1885
B.7.2.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation..........................................................1887
B.7.2.14 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT......................................1889
B.7.2.15 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.............................1890
B.7.2.16 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation............................................................................................1891
B.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM........................................................................................................................1892
B.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs....................................................................1892
B.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs....................................................................1893
B.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs....................................................................1894
B.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB..........................................................................1896
B.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT..........................................................................1897
B.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter..........................................................................1898
B.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring...................................................1899
B.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter............................................................1900
B.7.4 QoS Parameters.....................................................................................................................................................1901
B.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows..........................................................................1901
B.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR...........................................................................1904
B.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS.............................................................................1906
B.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS...................................................................1908
B.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues.......................................1909
B.7.4.6 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Port Shaping..................................................................................1911
B.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards........................................................................................................1912
B.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port.........................................................................................1912
B.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port..........................................................................................1920
B.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames.........................................................................................1926
B.8 RMON Parameters...................................................................................................................................................1927
B.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group............................................................................1927
B.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..............................................................................1928
B.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group.................................................................1929
B.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting.............................................................................1930
B.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services.....................................................................................................................1932
B.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.....................................................................................................................................1933
B.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels......................................................................1933
B.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel................................................................1934
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxv

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.............................1938


B.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels...............................1942
B.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters.........................................................1947
B.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI...............................................................................1953
B.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping......................................................................1954
B.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute............................................................1957
B.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management............................................................................1960
B.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation..........................................................................1966
B.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM.....................................................................................1976
B.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping.......................................................................................1980
B.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.............................................................................1983
B.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management.........................................................................1986
B.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation............................................................................1990
B.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation.........................................................................1995
B.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation...............................2006
B.9.2 CES Parameters....................................................................................................................................................2012
B.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management...........................................................................................2012
B.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation............................................................................2022
B.9.3 ATM Parameters...................................................................................................................................................2036
B.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management...................................................2036
B.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration..................................................2042
B.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status..............................................................2043
B.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status.................................................................2044
B.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management..............................................2045
B.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table.................................................2047
B.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation.................................2048
B.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management............................................................................................2050
B.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation............................................................................2055
B.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management........................................................................................2060
B.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation........................................................................2070
B.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes...........................................2083
B.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status......................................................2086
B.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status.........................................2091
B.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID...............................................................................2093
B.10 Clock Parameters...................................................................................................................................................2094
B.10.1 Parameter Description: Frequency Selection Mode............................................................................................2094
B.10.2 Physical Clock Parameters..................................................................................................................................2095
B.10.2.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.......................................................................................2095
B.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port........................2097
B.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet..........................................................................2099
B.10.2.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.........................................................................2102
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxvi

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Contents

B.10.2.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................................2105


B.10.2.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status.......................................................2106
B.10.2.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............................2108
B.10.2.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................................2110
B.10.2.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions.................................2111
B.10.2.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source...................................2113
B.10.2.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status..................................................................................2115
B.10.3 CES ACR Clock Parameters...............................................................................................................................2117
B.10.3.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source.....................................................................................................2117
B.10.3.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain............................................................................................................2117
B.10.3.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation............................................................................................2118
B.10.4 PTP Clock Parameters........................................................................................................................................2119
B.10.4.1 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute...............................................................................2119
B.10.4.2 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Attribute_Creation of PTP Clock Ports................................2130
B.10.4.3 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_Clock Subnet...........................................................2131
B.10.4.4 Parameter Description: Setting of a PTP Clock Subnet_BMC........................................................................2131
B.10.4.5 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Basic Attributes.........................................................................2133
B.10.4.6 Parameter Description: External Time Port_BMC..........................................................................................2134
B.10.4.7 Parameter Description: External Time Port_Cable Transmission Distance....................................................2136
B.10.5 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..............................................................................................................2138
B.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces.........................................................................................2139
B.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General........................................................................................................2139
B.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced....................................................................................................2141
B.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port................................................................................................2141
B.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port....................................................................................2142
B.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...............................................................................2143

C Glossary....................................................................................................................................2147

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxxvii

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

1 Configuration Preparations

Configuration Preparations

About This Chapter


Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.
1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools
The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.
1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions
Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

1 Configuration Preparations

1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


The relevant documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.

Documents
l

Network planning documents, such as the XXX Network Planning

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Configuration Guide

A computer where the U2000 server software is installed

A computer where the U2000 client software is installed

Tools

NOTE

For information about the software and hardware required for the U2000 and the installation method, see the
documents that accompany the U2000.

1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions


Before the configuration, check whether the configuration conditions meet the requirements.

Context
Ensure that the following requirements are met:
l

All the NEs on the network must be powered on properly.

The DCN communication between the gateway NE and the non-gateway NEs must be
normal.

The network communication between the U2000 server and the gateway NE must be
normal.

The U2000 client can log in to the U2000 server and has the "network operator" authority
or higher.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

2 U2000 Quick Start

U2000 Quick Start

The U2000 quick start guide helps to learn about basic operations on the U2000 client.
For details, see A.1 U2000 Quick Start.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Specifying the Configuration Procedure


You can select the proper configuration procedure according to the actual configuration
scenarios.

Initial Configuration
Initial configuration of a radio network refers to configuring network-wide service data by using
the NMS for the first time after the NE commissioning is complete. Figure 3-1 shows the
configuration procedure.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Figure 3-1 Configuration flowchart (initial configuration)


Start

Configuring the network topology

Configuring radio links

Configuring TDM services

Configuring Packet-Based Ethernet


services
Configuring EoS/EoPDH-Based
Ethernet services

Configuring MPLS packet services

Configuring the clock

Configuring auxiliary ports and


functions
End
Required
Optional

Table 3-1 describes the procedure in the configuration flowchart.


Table 3-1 Initial configuration

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Required.

6 Configuring Radio Links

Required.

7 Configuring TDM Services

Required when TDM services need to be


transmitted.

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services


on the Packet Plane

Required when Native Ethernet services based


on the packet plane need to be transmitted.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Operation

Description

9 Configuring EoS/EoPDH-Based
Ethernet Services

Required when Ethernet services based on the


EoS/EoPDH plane need to be transmitted.

Configuring MPLS
packet services

Required when MPLS packet services need to


be transmitted.

10 Configuring
MPLS Tunnels
11 Configuring
PWE3 Services

12 Configuring the Clock

Required.

13 Configuring Auxiliary Ports and


Functions

Required when orderwire information, wayside


E1 services, or synchronous/asynchronous data
services need to be transmitted or when the
external alarm input/output function or the
outdoor cabinet monitoring function needs to be
enabled.

NOTE

The configuration sequence provided in Table 3-1 is for reference only and needs to be adjusted as required in
actual application scenarios.

Network Adjustment
Network adjustment involves adding and adjusting configuration data in the equipment
commissioning and operation phases. You can find the corresponding configuration operations
according to the actual network adjustment requirements in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Network adjustment

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

14.1 Common Task Collection (Network


Topology)

This common task collection lists configuration


operations associated with NE attributes,
including changing the ID and IP address of an
NE.

14.2 Common Task Collection (Radio


Links)

This common task collection lists configuration


operations associated with radio links, including
changing the working mode of a TDM radio link
and changing the number of E1s on a Hybrid
radio link.

14.3 Common Task Collection (TDM


Services)

This common task collection lists configuration


operations associated with TDM services,
including deleting TDM services and upgrading
a normal service to an SNCP service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

3 Specifying the Configuration Procedure

Operation

Description

14.4 Common Task Collection (PacketPlane Ethernet Services)

This common task collection lists configuration


operations associated with Native Ethernet
services based on the packet plane, including
setting or modifying Ethernet port parameters
and deleting Ethernet services.

14.5 Task Collection (EoS/EoPDHPlane Ethernet Services)

This common task collection lists configuration


operations associated with Ethernet services
based on the EoS/EoPDH plane, including
setting or modifying Ethernet port parameters
and deleting Ethernet services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Common Network Scenarios of


Configuration Examples

About This Chapter


Initial configuration examples of each section are provided in the same TDM radio network
scenario or IP radio network scenario.
4.1 Common Network Scenario of the TDM Radio Network
Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the TDM radio
network where a TDM radio chain network and a TDM radio ring network are interconnected
through a third-party SDH network.
4.2 Common Network Scenario of the IP Radio Network
Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the IP radio
network where a Hybrid radio chain network, a Hybrid radio ring network, and a packet network
are interconnected. The packet network is a GE packet ring that includes packet radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

4.1 Common Network Scenario of the TDM Radio Network


Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the TDM radio
network where a TDM radio chain network and a TDM radio ring network are interconnected
through a third-party SDH network.

Overall Topology
Figure 4-1 shows the overall topology of the TDM radio network. On this network, base station
backhaul services are converged at a TDM radio chain network and a TDM radio ring network
and then are transmitted over a third-party SDH network to the BSC.
Figure 4-1 Overall topology of the TDM radio network

STM-1
TDM radio chain
network

Third party SDH network


BSC
E1
TDM radio ring
network

TDM Radio Chain Network


Figure 4-2 shows the topology of a TDM radio chain network. In this topology, all base stations
are 2G base stations connected to NEs at E1 ports. The base station backhaul services converged
from the TDM radio chain network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network to the
BSC. The TDM radio chain network and TDM radio ring network are interconnected through
STM-1 fiber links configured with linear MSP.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-2 Topology of the TDM radio chain network


NMS

BTS12

E1

DCN
STM-1

E1

Third party
SDH network

NE14

BTS13
NE13

NE12

E1

BTS11

E1

E1

STM-1

NE11

NE15

NE16

BTS14

BTS15

Figure 4-3 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.
Figure 4-3 Board configuration of NEs on the TDM radio chain network

NE14
IF1

NE13

E1

BTS12

CSTA

IF1
IF1
CSTA

BTS13

IF1

CSTA

NE16

IF1

NE15

IF1
IF1
CSTA

IF1
CSTA

STM-1

E1

IF1

NE11

NE12

Third party
SDH netw ork

E1

BTS11

STM-1

IF1
CSTA
E1

E1

BTS14

BTS15

TDM Radio Ring Network


Figure 4-4 shows the topology of a TDM radio ring network. In this topology, all base stations
are 2G base stations connected to NEs at E1 ports. The TDM radio ring network is interconnected
with a third-party SDH network by using E1 cables. Therefore, the base station backhaul services
converged from the TDM radio ring network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network
to the BSC.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-4 Topology of the TDM radio ring network

NMS
DCN
Third party
SDH network

E1
NE21

BTS21
NE22

NE24

BTS24

BTS22

NE23
BTS23

Figure 4-5 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.
Figure 4-5 Board configuration of NEs on the TDM radio ring network
NE21
Third party
SDH netw ork

E1

IF1

IF1
CSTA

E1
NE24

NE22
BTS22

IF1

IF1

IF1
CSTA

IF1
CSTA

E1
BTS24

BTS23

E1
NE23
IF1

CSTA

IF1

E1
BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

4.2 Common Network Scenario of the IP Radio Network


Initial configuration examples are provided in a common network scenario of the IP radio
network where a Hybrid radio chain network, a Hybrid radio ring network, and a packet network
are interconnected. The packet network is a GE packet ring that includes packet radio links.

Overall Topology
Figure 4-6 shows the overall topology of the IP radio network. The base station backhaul
services converged from a Hybrid radio chain network, a Hybrid radio ring network, and a packet
radio chain network are transmitted to the BSC/RNC over a GE packet ring.
Figure 4-6 Overall topology of the IP radio network

Packet radio chain


network

GE packet ring

NMS

Hybrid radio chain


network
BSC
Hybrid radio ring
network
RNC

Packet Network
Figure 4-7 shows the topology of the packet network. The packet network receives various base
station services and the base station backhaul services converged from a Hybrid radio chain
network and a Hybrid radio ring network. The base station services transmitted on the network
are:
l

2G base station services (CES services transmitted to the BSC from E1 ports)

R99 base station services (ATM PWE3 services transmitted to the RNC from E1 ports)

R4 base station services (ETH PWE3 services transmitted to the RNC from GE ports)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-7 Topology of the packet network


NE34

BTS33

NE33
FE

BTS31

R4
BTS32
E1

BTS34

R4

E1

R99

FE
GE

GE

NE32
Hybrid radio chain
network

NE31

NE11

NMS
E1

GE

NE21

GE
+G
E1

E1

E1

BTS36

Hybrid radio ring


network

BTS35

R99
BTS37

BSC

R99
BTS38
RNC

NOTE

l NE31 is an OptiX PTN NE in an actual network as it does not connect to any radio links. In this example,
NE31 is an IDU.
l NE11 receives base station services from BTS35 and BTS36 by using the Fractional E1 function.
l NE21 receives base station services from BTS37 and BTS38 by using the Fractional E1 function.

Figure 4-8 provides the board configuration of each NE on the packet network.
Figure 4-8 Board configuration of NEs on the packet network
BTS33

NE34

FE FE

NE33

ISU2
CSHD

ISU2
ISU2
CSHD
E1
E1

R4
E1

BTS34

BTS32

BTS31

R99

NE32
ISU2

Hybrid radio chain


network

E1

R4
GE

NE31

ISU2
CSHD
E1
E1

GE

ISU2

E1

ISU2
CSHD
E1 +FE

R99
BTS37

E1

GE

NE21

BTS35

R99
BTS38

GE
GE

EM6T
CSHD
E1

E1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

FE

NE11
ISU2

BTS36

CSHD
E1

GE

BSC

RNC

Hybrid radio ring


network

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

NOTE

l The Native E1 services received by the Hybrid radio network are converted to CES services by crossconnecting some E1 ports on the CSHD boards of NE11 and NE21.
l The Native E-LAN services received by the Hybrid radio network are converted to E-Line services, which
can be carried by PWs, by cross-connecting some FE ports on the CSHD board of NE21. NE11 receives
Native E-Line services and does not require port cross-connections.
l The GE port connected to the RNC is configured into a LAG.

Hybrid Radio Chain Network


Figure 4-9 shows the topology of the Hybrid radio chain network. The Hybrid radio chain
network receives various base station services and transmits them to the packet network through
NE11. The base station services transmitted on the network are:
l

R99 base station services (Native E1 services)

R4 base station services (Native Ethernet services)

Figure 4-9 Topology of the Hybrid radio chain network

R4
BTS12

R99
BTS13

FE
E1+GE+
NE cascade

E1

NE14

Packet network
NE13

NE16

NE12

E1

FE

FE
NE11
R4
BTS11

NE15

R4
BTS15

R99
BTS14

NOTE

The cascading ports of NE12 and NE13 are connected by using network cables for DCN communication.

Figure 4-10 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-10 Board configuration of NEs on the Hybrid radio chain network

NE14
ISU2

FE
R4
BTS12

CSHA
E1

NE16
ISU2

Packet network

NE12

NE13
ISU2
ISU2
CSHA

ISU2

ISU2
CSHA

E1+GE+NE cascade

NE11
FE

R99
BTS13

R4
BTS11

NE15
ISU2

CSHA

ISU2
CSHA
E1

FE
R4
BTS15

R99
BTS14

Hybrid Radio Ring Network


Figure 4-11 shows the topology of the Hybrid radio ring network. The Hybrid radio ring network
receives various base station services and transmits them to the packet network through NE21.
The base station services transmitted on the network are:
l

2G base station services (Native E1 services)

R4 base station services (Native Ethernet services)

Figure 4-11 Topology of the Hybrid radio ring network

Packet network

NE21

R4
BTS21

FE
FE
E1 NE22

NE24

R4
BTS24

BTS22
FE
NE23
R4
BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

4 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples

Figure 4-12 shows the board configuration of each NE on the radio network.
Figure 4-12 Board configuration of NEs on the Hybrid radio ring network

Packet network

NE21

FE
NE24

NE22

R4
BTS21

ISU2

ISU2
ISU2
CSHA

ISU2
CSHA

FE

R4
BTS24

BTS22

E1
NE23
ISU2
ISU2
CSHA

FE

R4
BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Configuring the Network Topology

About This Chapter


You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology on the network.
5.1 Basic Concepts
Before configuring the network topology, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.
5.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedures for configuring the four topological objects, namely, NEs,
boards, fibers/cables, and subnets.
5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network Topology)
This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.
5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network Topology)
This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.
5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network)
This topic considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.
5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network)
This topic considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.
5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network)
This section considers the NEs on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
NEs according to the network planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the network topology, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

5.1.1 DCN
To manage and maintain an NE, the U2000 needs to communicate with the NE through the data
communication network (DCN).
On a DCN, the U2000 and all the NEs are considered as nodes on the DCN. The DCN between
the U2000 and all the NEs is considered as the external DCN, and the DCN between the NEs is
considered as the internal DCN. The OptiX RTN 910 supports several DCN solutions, including
HWECC and IP DCN. HWECC is the commonest DCN solution.
HWECC is a DCN solution provided by Huawei. In this solution, the NMS manages NEs using
network management messages that are encapsulated in the HWECC protocol stack.
Figure 5-1 shows how network management messages are transmitted in the HWECC solution.
Network management messages encapsulated in compliance with the HWECC protocol stack
can be transmitted through the following DCN channels:
l

DCCs carried by SDH or microwave links

Integrated IP radio links or Ethernet paths over FE/GE ports

Ethernet network management ports or NE cascading ports

Figure 5-1 HWECC solution

Message
HWECC
DCC

Message
HWECC
DCC

Message
HWECC
ETH

Message
HWECC
DCC

NMS
Message
HWECC
DCC

Message
HWECC
DCC

OptiX radio
transmission equipment

OptiX optical
transmission equipment
Radio link

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Fiber

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Ethernet link

18

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.1.2 GNE and Non-GNE


A gateway NE (GNE) refers to an NE whose application layer communicates directly with the
NMS application layer. A non-GNE refers to an NE whose application layer communicates with
the NMS application layer by forwarding data through the GNE application layer.

GNE
Generally, a GNE is connected to the NMS through a local area network (LAN) or wide area
network (WAN). Its application layer can directly communicate with the NMS application layer.
One set of NMS needs to be connected to one or more GNEs.
ECC communication between the GNEs may create an oversized DCN. To prevent this, disable
extended ECC for the GNEs.

Non-GNE
A non-GNE communicates with the GNE through the DCN channels between NEs.

5.1.3 NE ID and NE IP Address


The ID and IP address are the unique NE on the DCN.

NE ID
At the application layer of each DCN solution, an OptiX NE uses its NE ID as the NE address.
Therefore, each NE must have a unique NE ID on the DCN and all these NE IDs must be planned
in a unified manner.
The NE ID has 24 bits. The most significant eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended
ID) and the least significant 16 bits represent the basic ID. For example, if an NE ID is 0x090001,
the subnet ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1.

NE IP Address
An NE uses an IP address as its unique identifier during TCP/IP communication.
In the HWECC solution, the IP addresses of the NEs on the DCN are used in the following
scenarios:
l

A gateway NE (GNE) communicates with the U2000 over TCP/IP. The IP address of the
GNE must be planned as required by the external DCN.

Different NEs communicate with each other over extended ECC channels. In this scenario,
NE IP addresses must be on the same network segment. By default, NE IP addresses are
on the 129.9.0.0 network segment.

In the DCN solution (for example, IP DCN) where network management messages are
transmitted over TCP/IP, an NE IP address is used as the NE address at the network layer.
Therefore, each NE IP address on the DCN must be unique and all these NE IP addresses must
be planned in a unified manner.
By default (which indicates that an NE IP address is never manually changed), this NE IP address
is automatically changed to 0x81000000 + ID if the NE ID is changed. For example, if an NE
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

IP address is never manually changed, this NE IP address is automatically changed to 129.9.0.1


when the NE ID is changed to 0x090001. Once an NE IP address is manually changed, the
interlocking relationship between the NE ID and NE IP address no longer takes effect.
It is recommended to configure the IP address of a GNE on a different network segment from
the IP addresses of its non-GNEs.

5.1.4 Physical Boards and Logical Boards


The NE software and NMS consider a physical board as one or more logical boards when
managing the physical board.
Table 5-1 provides the mappings between the physical boards and logical boards.
Table 5-1 Mappings between the physical boards and logical boards

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Physical Board

Logical Board

CSTA

CSTA in slot 1 + SL1D in slot 8 + SP3S in


slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

CSHA

CSHA in slot 1 + EM4T in slot 7 + SP3S in


slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

CSHB

CSHB in slot 1 + EM4T in slot 7 + SP3D in


slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

CSHC

CSHC in slot 1 + EM4F in slot 7 + SL1D in


slot 8 + SP3S in slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

CSHD

CSHD in slot 1 + EM6X in slot 7 + MP1 in


slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

CSHE

CSHD in slot 1 + EM6TB in slot 7 + MP1 in


slot 9 + AUX in slot 10

IF1

IF1 in the same slot

IFU2

IFU2 in the same slot

IFX2

IFX2 in the same slot

ISU2

ISU2 in the same slot

ISX2

ISX2 in the same slot

SL1D

SL1D in the same slot

SL1DA

SL1DA in the same slot

EM6T

EM6T in the same slot

EM6TA

EM6TA in the same slot

EM6F

EM6F in the same slot

EM6FA

EM6FA in the same slot


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Physical Board

Logical Board

EFP8

EFP8 in the same slot

EMS6

EMS6 in the same slot

SP3S

SP3S in the same slot

SP3D

SP3D in the same slot

ML1

ML1 in the same slot

MD1

MD1 in the same slot

PIU

PIU in the same slot

FAN

FAN in the same slot

ODU

ODU in the slot whose number is 20 plus the


slot number for the IF board that is connected
to the ODU

5.1.5 Fiber/Cable Types


You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relations between NEs by using the fiber
management function of the U2000. You can manage the fibers and cables by using the
U2000, including SDH fibers, radio links, Ethernet fibers/cables, extended ECC cables, and
back-to-back radio connections.
l

SDH fibers
SDH fibers refer to the fiber connections between different sets of equipment. That is, SDH
fibers indicate the connection relations between different SDH optical ports.

Radio links
Radio links refer to the radio connections between different sets of radio equipment. That
is, the radio links indicate the connection relations between different IF ports.

Ethernet fibers/cables
Ethernet fibers/cables refer to the Ethernet fiber/cable connections between different sets
of equipment. that is, the Ethernet fibers/cables indicate the connection relationship
between different Ethernet ports.

Extended ECC cables


Extended ECC cables refer to the extended ECC channels between the NEs. That is, the
extended ECC cables indicate the connection relations between the NEs.

Back-to-back radio connections


Back-to-back radio connections refer to the NE cascading relations. That is, the back-toback radio connections indicate the connection relations between the NEs.
NOTE

Fibers and cables are topological objects on the U2000. Hence, operations on the fibers or cables do not affect
the normal running of the NEs.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.1.6 Subnet
NEs in a same domain or with similar attributes can be allocated to a same subnet. In this way,
they can be displayed as a whole on the U2000, thus facilitating the NE management.
The subnets are topological objects on the U2000. Hence, operations on the subnets do not affect
the normal running of the NEs. In the case of a large number of topological objects, subnets that
contain multiple NEs simplify the topology view on the U2000.

5.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedures for configuring the four topological objects, namely, NEs,
boards, fibers/cables, and subnets.
Figure 5-2 provides the procedure for configuring the network topology.
Figure 5-2 Configuration flow chart (network topology)
Start

Creating NEs

Configuring NE attributes

Configuring DCCs

Synchronizing NE time

Setting the performance


monitoring status
Creating fibers/cables and
subnets

End
Required
Optional

The procedure in the configuration flow chart is described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

NOTE

l If the NE ID and NE name are changed in the NE commissioning process and if the NE communication
parameters, logical boards, VLAN ID and bandwidth of the inband DCN are set during the NE
commissioning, the configuration data is automatically synchronized onto the U2000 in the NE data
uploading process. Hence, you do not need to perform the corresponding operations in the initial
configuration process.
l The DCN configuration procedure provided in Figure 5-2 is only a typical HWECC solution configuration.
For the configuration procedure for an HWECC solution containing special requirements or another DCN
solution, see related descriptions in the Feature Description.

Table 5-2 Procedure for creating NEs


Step

Operation

Creating NEs
on the U2000

Description
A.2.1.2 Creating
NEs by Using
the Manual
Method

It is recommended that you perform this


operation to add one or more NEs to a large
existing network on the U2000.
To achieve SSL communication between the
NMS and the gateway NE, Connection
Mode needs to be set to Security SSL.

A.2.1.1 Creating
NEs by Using
the Search
Method

It is recommended that you perform this


operation to create NEs on the U2000 in other
cases. The following parameters need to be
set:
l Set Search Mode to Search for NE.
l Search Domain: When the IP address of
the GNE is known, it is recommended that
you set the IP address range of the GNE
as the search domain. In the case of initial
configuration, it is recommended that you
set the 129.9.255.255 network segment as
the search domain.
l Search for NE: It is recommended that
you select Create NE after search, and
Upload after create. By default, NE
User is root and Password is password.
l Connection Mode: This parameter
specifies the connection mode between
the NMS and the gateway NE. For SSL
connection, set this parameter to Security
SSL.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.2.2.1 Uploading the NE Data

If you select Upload after create during A.


2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search
Method, skip this operation.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Table 5-3 Procedure for configuring NE attributes


Step

Operation

Description

A.2.1.5
Changing
the NE ID

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Change New ID to be the NE ID specified during the
planning of the DCN.
l If the extended NE ID is required, change New Extended
ID.

A.2.1.6
Changing
the NE
Name

Optional.

A.2.1.3
Configuring
the Logical
Board

Required.

Table 5-4 Procedure for configuring DCCs


Step

Operation

Description

A.2.7.1
Setting NE
Communica
tion
Parameters

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of the GNE, set IP Address and Subnet
Mask according to the planning of the external DCN.
l In the case of the GNE, set if the external DCN requires.
l Generally, it is recommended that you set Connection
Mode to Common + Security SSL. If you need to set the
gateway NE to allow for NMS access only in SSL
connection mode, set Connection Mode to Security
SSL.
l In the case of non-GNEs, it is recommended that you set
IP Address to 0x81000000 + NE ID. That is, if the NE ID
is 0x090001, set IP Address to 129.9.0.1. Set Subnet
Mask to 255.255.0.0.
NOTE
If the IP address of an NE is not changed manually, the IP address
changes according to the NE ID and is always 0x81000000 + NE ID.
In this case, the IP address of a non-GNE does not need to be changed
manually.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.2.7.2
Configuring
DCCs

If the OptiX RTN 910 needs to interconnect with third-party


equipment or use inband DCN channels provided by the
Integrated IP radio.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step

Operation

Description

A.2.7.8
Configuring
Extended
ECC
Communica
tion

For a gateway NE, disable the automatic extended ECC


function.

A.2.7.4
Configuring
the VLAN
ID and
Bandwidth
Used by an
Inband
DCN

Perform this operation if the OptiX RTN equipment uses the


inband DCN solution and if the VLAN ID and bandwidth
planned for this inband DCN do not assume their default
values (the default VLAN ID is 4094 and the default
bandwidth is 512 kbit/s).

Configuring
the Protocol
Type of the
Inband DCN

Required. If inband DCN channels use the HWECC protocol,


set Protocol Type to HWECC. If inband DCN channels use
the IP protocol, set Protocol Type to IP.

A.2.7.6
Setting
Parameters
of Inband
DCN

Required in the case of the Integrated IP radio network. Set


the parameters as follows:
l In the case of the Ethernet ports and microwave ports that
interconnect with the packet switching equipment, set
Enabled Status to Enabled.
l In the case of the other ports, set Enabled Status to
Disabled.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Table 5-5 Procedure for synchronizing NE time


Step

Operation

Synchroni
zing the
NE time

Description
A.2.1.7
Synchron
izing the
NE Time

Required.
l To synchronize the NEs with the NM server, set
the relevant parameters as follows:
Set Synchronous Mode to NM.
Right-click and choose the operation from the
shortcut menu to ensure that the NE are
synchronized with the NM time immediately.
Set the synchronization parameters according
to the requirements. It is recommended that
the parameters adopt the default values.
l To synchronize the NEs with the NTP server, set
the relevant parameters as follows:
Set Synchronous Mode to Standard NTP.
Set Standard NTP Authentication
according to the requirements for the NTP
server.
It is recommended that you set the upper level
NTP server that the NEs trace as follows:
In the case of the GNE, set the external
NTP server to the upper level NTP server.
Set Standard NTP Server Identifier to
IP and set Standard NTP Server to the
IP address of the external NTP server.
In the case of a non-GNE, set the GNE to
the upper level NTP server. If the nonGNE needs to communicate with the GNE
through the HWECC protocol, set
Standard NTP Server Identifier to NE
ID and set Standard NTP Server to the
NE ID of the GNE. If the non-GNE needs
to communicate with the GNE through the
IP protocol, set Standard NTP Server
Identifier to IP and set Standard NTP
Server to the IP address of the GNE.
Set Standard NTP Server Key according
to the requirements for the NTP server.

A.2.1.8
Localizin
g the NE
Time

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Required if the DST scheme is used at the local area.


Set the parameters according to the planning of the
DST at the local area.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Step

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Operation

Description
A.2.1.9
Configuri
ng
Standard
NTP Keys

Required if the standard NTP authentication is used


to synchronize the NEs with the NTP server.
Set the parameters according to the identification
authentication of the NTP.

Table 5-6 Procedure for setting the performance monitoring status


Step

Operation

Description

A.2.3
Configuring
the
Performanc
e
Monitoring
Status of
NEs

If the 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring


functions are set to Disabled, enable these performance
monitoring functions.

Table 5-7 Procedure for creating fibers/cables and subnets

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Step

Operation

Creating
fibers/
cables

Description
A.2.5.1
Creating
Optical
Fibers by
Using the
Search
Method

It is recommended that you perform this operation


to create radio links or SDH fibers on the U2000
when the physical radio links or SDH fibers exist.

A.2.5.2
Creating
Fibers
Manually

You need to perform this operation to create the


fibers and cables (such as Ethernet links and E1
cables) that cannot be searched for.

A.2.5.3 Creating an
Extended ECC

Optional when NEs are connected through extended


ECC channels.

A.2.5.4 Creating a
Back-to-Back Radio
Connection

Optional when there are cascading NEs on the


network.

Configuri
ng the
subnet

Optional.

A.2.6.1
Creating
a Subnet

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Step

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Operation

Description
A.2.6.2
Copying
Topology
Objects

Optional.

A.2.6.3
Moving
Topology
Objects

Optional.

5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network


Topology)
This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.

5.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Figure 5-3 shows a TDM radio chain network configured according to the following
requirements.
l

The TDM radio chain network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the
standalone U2000.

The U2000 is connected to NE11 with a network cable. Therefore, NE11 serves as a GNE
and the other NEs are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000 through NE11.

NE12 and NE13 are interconnected by using fibers.

The TDM radio chain network is interconnected with a third-party SDH network by using
fibers. Therefore, the base station backhaul services converged from the TDM radio chain
network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Figure 5-3 Networking diagram (TDM radio chain network)


NMS

BTS12

E1

DCN
STM-1

E1

Third party
SDH network

NE14

BTS13
NE13

NE12

E1

STM-1

BTS11

E1

E1

NE11

NE15

NE16
BTS15

BTS14

The connections of DCN links shown in Figure 5-3 are described as follows.
Table 5-8 Connections of DCN links (NE11)
Link

Port

Description

Link between NE11 and the


third-party SDH network

8-SL1D-1 (working unit)

l Configure the ports as a 1


+1 linear MSP group.

8-SL1D-2 (protection unit)

l The base station backhaul


services converged from
the TDM radio chain
network are transmitted
over the third-party SDH
network to the BSC.

5.3.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.
l

In this example, the network is comprised of OptiX RTN equipment only, and therefore
HWECC is preferred as the DCN solution. In the HWECC solution, NE12 and NE13
communicate with each other through DCC channels in the SDH optical fibers and the
other NEs communicate with each other through the DCC channels over microwave. If no
fiber connections are set up between NE12 and NE13, NE12 and NE13 communicate with
each other through the extended ECC that is enabled by default.

NE11 is the GNE. Hence, the extended ECC function of NE11 needs to be disabled.

The TDM radio chain network is connected to the third-party network through STM-1
optical fibers. The TDM radio chain and the third-party network are managed by the

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

U2000. Therefore, the DCC channel needs to be disabled over the port on the N11 for
connecting to the third-party network.
l

Figure 5-4 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.
Figure 5-4 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (TDM radio chain network)
NMS

10.0.0.100/16

9-14
129.9.0.14
0.0.0.0

NE14

9-16
129.9.0.16
0.0.0.0

NE16

9-15
129.9.0.15
0.0.0.0

NE15

9-13
129.9.0.13
0.0.0.0

NE13

9-12
129.9.0.12
0.0.0.0

9-11
10.0.0.11
0.0.0.0

NE12

NE11

Third party
SDH network

Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE11, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence,
if the IP address of an NE (not NE11) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP
address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.

In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create NE after search

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE is not changed manually and is not
known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the
search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended that you use the IP address of the
GNE as the search domain.

The icons of NE11 to NE16 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Paramete
r

Value
NE11

NE12

NE13

NE14

NE15

NE16

New ID

11

12

13

14

15

16

New
Extended
ID

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure the logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relations between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 4 See A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication
parameters.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE11

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

IP Address

10.0.0.11

Gateway IP Address

0.0.0.0 (default value)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter

Value
NE11

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0 (default value)

Extended ID

Connection Mode

Common + Security SSL

NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE11, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, you
need not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.

Step 5 See A.2.7.2 Configuring DCCs and configure the DCCs.


The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled/Disabled

8-SL1D-1

8-SL1D-2

Disabled

Disabled

Step 6 See A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication and disable the automatic extended
ECC function for the gateway NE (NE11).
Step 7 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode

NM

Synchronization Period(days)

Step 8 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
Step 9 See A.2.5.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection and create back-to-back radio
connections.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Source NE

NE12

Sink NE

NE13
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

----End

5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network


Topology)
This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
the network topology according to the network planning information.

5.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Figure 5-5 shows a TDM radio ring topology configured according to the following
requirements.
l

The TDM radio ring network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the
standalone U2000.

The U2000 is connected to NE21 with a network cable. Therefore, NE21 serves as a GNE
and the other NEs are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000 through NE21.

The TDM radio ring network is interconnected with a third-party SDH network by using
E1 cables. Therefore, the base station backhaul services converged from the TDM radio
ring network are transmitted over the third-party SDH network.

Figure 5-5 Networking diagram (TDM radio ring network)

NMS
DCN
Third party
SDH network

E1
NE21

BTS21
NE22

NE24

BTS24

BTS22

NE23
BTS23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

The connections of DCN links shown in Figure 5-5 are described as follows.
Table 5-9 Connections of DCN links (NE21)
Link

Port

Description

Link between NE21 and the


third-party SDH network

9-SP3S

The base station backhaul


services converged from the
TDM radio ring network are
transmitted over the thirdparty SDH network to the
BSC.

5.4.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.
l

In this example, the network is comprised of OptiX RTN equipment only, and therefore
HWECC is preferred as the DCN solution. In the HWECC solution, the NEs communicate
with each other through the DCC channels over microwave.

NE21 is the GNE. Hence, the extended ECC function of NE21 should be disabled.

The TDM radio ring network is connected to the third-party network through E1 cables
and cannot communicate with the third-party network. Therefore, the DCC channels need
to be disabled on NE21.

Figure 5-6 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.
Figure 5-6 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (TDM radio ring network)

Third part
SDH network

E1

10.0.0.101/16

9-21
10.0.0.21
0.0.0.0
9-22
129.9.0.22
0.0.0.0

NE22

NE21

9-23
129.9.0.23
0.0.0.0

NE23

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

9-24
129.9.0.24
0.0.0.0

NE24
Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE21, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence,
if the IP address of an NE (not NE21) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP
address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.

In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create NE after search

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE is not changed manually and the IP
addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using the
129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is recommended
that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.

The icons of NE21 to NE24 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Value
NE21

NE22

NE23

NE24

New ID

21

22

23

24

New Extended
ID

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relations between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 4 See A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication
parameters.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE21

IP Address

10.0.0.21

Gateway IP Address

0.0.0.0 (default value)

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0 (default value)

Extended ID

Connection Mode

Common + Security SSL

NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE21, are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, you
need not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.

Step 5 See A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication and disable the automatic extended
ECC function for the gateway NE (NE21).
Step 6 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Synchronous Mode

NM

Synchronization Period(days)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step 7 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
----End

5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network)


This topic considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.

5.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Figure 5-7 shows a Hybrid radio chain network configured according to the following
requirements.
l

The Hybrid radio chain network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by
the U2000 connected to the packet network.

All NEs on the Hybrid radio chain network are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000
through the packet network.

The Hybrid radio chain network receives various base station services and transmits them
to the packet network through NE11.

NE12 and NE13 are interconnected through cascading ports.


NOTE

For details on configuration of NE11, see 5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network).

Figure 5-7 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio chain network)

R4
BTS12

R99
BTS13

FE
E1+GE+
NE cascade

E1

NE14

Packet network
NE13

NE16

E1

FE

NE11
R4
BTS11

NE15

R4
BTS15

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

NE12

FE

R99
BTS14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

5.5.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.
l

All NEs except NE11 adopt HWECC for DCN communication. To be specific, NE12 and
NE13 are interconnected through cascading ports and adopt automatic extended ECC
(enabled by default) for DCN communication; the other NEs use DCC channels in radio
signals for DCN communication.

NEs numbered 12 to 16 are not connected to the packet network. Therefore, to improve
bandwidth utilization, the inband DCN function is disabled at all ports of these NEs.

Figure 5-8 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.
Figure 5-8 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (Hybrid radio chain network)
9-14
129.9.0.14
0.0.0.0

NE14

9-16
129.9.0.16
0.0.0.0

9-15
129.9.0.15
0.0.0.0

NE15

NE16

9-13
129.9.0.13
0.0.0.0

9-12
129.9.0.12
0.0.0.0

NE13

NE12

Packet
network
NE11

Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, if the IP
address of an NE is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to be the
planned value after the NE ID is changed.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used in the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.

In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.5.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create NE after search

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE has not been changed manually and
that the IP addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using
the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is
recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.

The icons of NE12 to NE16 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE12

NE13

NE14

NE15

NE16

New ID

12

13

14

15

16

New
Extended
ID

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relationships between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 4 See A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN and enable/disable the inband DCN at the
ports.
The values for the related parameters of NE12 to NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All Ports

Enabled Status
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step 5 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode

NM

Synchronization Period(days)

Step 6 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
Step 7 See A.2.5.4 Creating a Back-to-Back Radio Connection and create back-to-back connections.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Source NE

NE12

Sink NE

NE13

----End

5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network)


This topic considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example and describes how to configure
NEs according to the planning information.

5.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Figure 5-9 shows a Hybrid radio ring network configured according to the following
requirements.
l

The Hybrid radio ring network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the
U2000 connected to the packet network.

All NEs on the Hybrid radio ring network are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000
through the packet network.

The Hybrid radio ring network receives various base station services and transmits them
to the packet network through NE21.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

NOTE

For details on configuration of NE21, see 5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network).

Figure 5-9 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio ring network)

Packet network

NE21

R4
BTS21

FE
FE
E1 NE22

NE24

R4
BTS24

BTS22
FE
NE23
R4
BTS23

5.6.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.
l

All NEs except NE21 adopt HWECC for DCN communication. In HWECC mode, NEs
use DCC channels in radio signals for DCN communication.

NEs numbered 22 to 24 are not connected to the packet network. Therefore, to improve
bandwidth utilization, the inband DCN function is disabled at all ports of these NEs.

Figure 5-10 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Figure 5-10 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (Hybrid radio ring network)
Packet network

NE21

9-22
129.9.0.22
0.0.0.0

NE22

9-24
129.9.0.24
0.0.0.0

9-23
129.9.0.23
0.0.0.0

NE23

NE24
Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs are in the interlocking relations with the NE IDs. Hence, if the IP
address of an NE is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes the IP address to be the
planned value after the NE ID is changed.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used in the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.

In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create NE after search

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Parameter

Value
NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE has not been changed manually and
that the IP addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using
the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is
recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.

The icons of NE22 to NE24 should be displayed on the Main Topology and all the NE data
should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE22

NE23

NE24

New ID

22

23

24

New Extended ID

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

9 (default value)

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relationships between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Step 4 See A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN.
The values for the related parameters of NE22 to NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All Ports

Enabled Status

Disabled

Step 5 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronous Mode
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

NM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Value
All the Ports on All the NEs

Synchronization Period(days)

Step 6 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
----End

5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network)


This section considers the NEs on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
NEs according to the network planning information.

5.7.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Figure 5-11 shows a packet network configured according to the following requirements.
l

The packet network receives various base station services and the base station backhaul
services converged from a Hybrid radio chain network and a Hybrid radio ring network.

The packet network is comprised of the OptiX RTN equipment managed by the U2000.
NOTE

NE31 is an OptiX PTN NE in an actual network because it does not support any radio links. In this
example, NE31 is an IDU.

The U2000 is connected to NE31 by using a network cable. Therefore, NE31 serves as a
GNE and the other NEs are non-GNEs with an access to the U2000 through NE31.

The NEs on the packet ring are interconnected through GE fiber links. The NEs on the
packet chain are interconnected through Packet radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Figure 5-11 Networking diagram (packet network)


NE34

BTS33

NE33
FE

BTS31

R4
BTS32
E1

BTS34

R4

E1

R99

FE
GE

GE

NE32
Hybrid radio chain
network

NE31

NE11
GE

NE21

GE
+G
E1

E1

NMS
E1

E1

BTS36

Hybrid radio ring


network

BTS35

R99
BTS37

BSC

R99
BTS38
RNC

The connections of DCN links shown in Figure 5-11 are described as follows.
Table 5-10 Connections of DCN links (NE31)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE31 and NE21

7-EM6X-6

Between NE31 and NE32

7-EM6X-5

Transmits services on the


packet ring.

Table 5-11 Connections of DCN links (NE32)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE32 and NE31

7-EM6X-6

Between NE32 and NE11

7-EM6X-5

Transmits services on the


packet ring.

Between NE32 and NE33

3-ISU2-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Transmits services on the


packet chain.

45

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Table 5-12 Connections of DCN links (NE33)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE33 and NE32

4-ISU2-1

Between NE33 and NE34

3-ISU2-1

Transmits services on the


packet chain.

Table 5-13 Connections of DCN links (NE34)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE34 and NE33

3-ISU2-1

Transmits services on the


packet chain.

Table 5-14 Connections of DCN links (NE11)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE11 and NE32

7-EM6X-6

Between NE11 and NE21

7-EM6X-5

Transmits services on the


packet ring.

Table 5-15 Connections of DCN links (NE21)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE21 and NE11

7-EM6X-6

Between NE21 and NE31

7-EM6X-5

Transmits services on the


packet ring.

5.7.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.
l

Service channels are used for communication because NEs on the packet ring are
interconnected through GE fiber links. For the convenience of maintenance, inband DCN
is adopted on the packet ring and the packet chain.

Plan the channel for inband DCN.


On the packet ring, the inband DCN function needs to be enabled at Ethernet ports of
all NEs and be disabled at other ports.
On the packet chain, the inband DCN function needs to be enabled at microwave ports
of all NEs and be disabled at other ports.

l
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Plan the management VLAN ID and bandwidth of inband DCN for each NE.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

The management VLAN ID takes the default value 4094.


If the number of NEs is not greater than 50, set the bandwidth of the inband DCN to
512 kbit/s (default value).
l

To facilitate interconnection with equipment that does not support HWECC, plane inband
DCN channels to use the default IP protocol.

The extended ECC function needs to be disabled on the GNE, namely, NE31.

Figure 5-12 shows the ID and IP address that are allocated to each NE according to the
uniform DCN planning information.
Figure 5-12 Allocated IDs and IP addresses (packet network)
9-34
129.9.0.34
0.0.0.0

9-33
129.9.0.33
0.0.0.0

NE34

NE33
GE

Packet
radio link
9-32
129.9.0.32
0.0.0.0

GE

NE32

Hybrid Radio
Network

NMS

9-31
10.0.0.31
0.0.0.0

9-11
129.9.0.11
0.0.0.0 NE11

NE31

NE11
GE

9-21
129.9.0.21
0.0.0.0

GE

10.0.0.103/16

NE21

Hybrid Radio
Network

Extended ID-Basic ID
IP address
Gateway

NOTE

l The subnet mask for the IP address of each NE is 255.255.0.0.


l The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE31, are in the interlocking relationships with the NE IDs.
Hence, if the IP address of an NE (not NE31) is not changed manually, the NE automatically changes
the IP address to be the planned value after the NE ID is changed.

In this example, the policy of synchronizing the NE with the NM server is used. The
automatic synchronization period is one day. The daylight saving time (DST) scheme is
not used at the local area.

The 15-minute and 24-hour performance monitoring functions are enabled.

In this configuration example, no subnets need to be configured.

5.7.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Precautions
If the NE ID and the values of NE communication parameters are changed and the logical boards
are configured in the NE commissioning process, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.1.1 Creating NEs by Using the Search Method and create the NEs.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Search Domain

Search for NE

IP Address

129.9.255.255

Search User

root

Create NE after search

Selected

Upload after create

Selected

NE User

root

Password

password

NOTE

In this configuration example, it is assumed that the IP address of the GNE has not been changed manually and
that the IP addresses of the non-GNEs are not known. Hence, you need to search for and create the NEs by using
the 129.9.255.255 network segment as the search domain. If the IP address of the GNE is known, it is
recommended that you use the IP address of the GNE as the search domain.

The icons of NE31 to NE34, NE11, and NE21 should be displayed on the Main Topology and
all the NE data should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 See A.2.1.5 Changing the NE ID and change the NE ID.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Paramete
r

Value
NE31

NE32

NE33

NE34

NE11

NE21

New ID

31

32

33

34

11

21

New
Extended
ID

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

9 (default
value)

Step 3 See A.2.1.3 Configuring the Logical Board and configure logical boards.
Configure the logical boards according to the mapping relationships between the physical boards
and logical boards.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

Step 4 See A.2.7.1 Setting NE Communication Parameters and set the NE communication
parameters.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE31

IP Address

10.0.0.31

Gateway IP Address

0.0.0.0 (default value)

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0 (default value)

Extended ID

Connection Mode

Common + Security SSL

NOTE

The IP addresses of all the NEs, except NE31, are in the interlocking relationships with the NE IDs. Hence, you
need not change the values of the NE communication parameters manually.

Step 5 See A.2.7.8 Configuring Extended ECC Communication and disable the automatic extended
ECC function for the gateway NE (NE31).
Step 6 See A.2.7.6 Setting Parameters of Inband DCN and configure the extended ECC.
The values for the related parameters of NE31 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled Status

7-EM6X-5

7-EM6X-6

Other Ports

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled Status

7-EM6X-5

7-EM6X-6

3-ISU2-1

Other Ports

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled Status
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Other Ports

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

5 Configuring the Network Topology

The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled Status

3-ISU2-1

Other Ports

Enabled

Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled Status

7-EM6X-5

7-EM6X-6

Other Ports

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

The values for the related parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Enabled Status

7-EM6X-5

7-EM6X-6

Other Ports

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Step 7 See A.2.1.7 Synchronizing the NE Time and synchronize the NE time.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
All Ports on All NEs

Synchronous Mode

NM

Synchronization Period(days)

Step 8 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links or
SDH fiber connections.
Normally, all the radio links or SDH fiber connections should be created successfully on the
Main Topology.
----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Configuring Radio Links

About This Chapter


Before configuring services on a radio link, you need to configure the radio link.
6.1 Basic Concepts
Before configuring the radio link, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.
6.2 Configuration Procedure
The configuration procedures of different radio link configuration methods are different.
6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a TDM radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the planning information.
6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network)
This section considers TDM radio links on a TDM radio ring network as examples to describe
how to configure radio links according to the network planning information.
6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.
6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio ring network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.
6.7 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Packet Network)
This section considers radio links on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
radio links according to the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

6.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the radio link, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

6.1.1 Adaptive Modulation


The adaptive modulation (AM) technology adjusts the modulation scheme automatically based
on channel quality.
When the AM technology is adopted, in the case of the same channel spacing, the microwave
service bandwidth varies according to the modulation scheme; the higher the modulation
efficiency, the higher the bandwidth of the transmitted services.
l

When the channel quality is good (such as on days when weather conditions are favorable),
the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit more user services.
This improves transmission efficiency and spectrum utilization of the system.

When the channel quality deteriorates (such as on days with adverse weather), the
equipment adopts a low-efficiency modulation scheme to transmit only higher-priority
services within the available bandwidth while discarding lower-priority services. This
method improves anti-interference capabilities of the radio link, which helps ensure the
link availability for higher-priority services.

In Integrated IP radio mode, the equipment supports the AM technology. With configurable
priorities for E1 services and packet services, the transmission is controlled based on the service
bandwidth and QoS policies corresponding to the current modulation scheme. The highestpriority services are transmitted with precedence.
NOTE

In Integrated IP radio mode, when the equipment transmits STM-1 services and packet services at the same
time, STM-1 services have highest priority and their transmission is ensured.

Priorities of E1 services
The priorities of E1 services are assigned based on the number of E1 services that each
modulation scheme can transmit. When modulation scheme switching occurs, only the E1
services whose number is specified in the new modulation scheme can be transmitted and
the excess E1 services are discarded.

Priorities of packet services


With the QoS technology, packet services are scheduled to queues with different priorities.
The services in different queues are transmitted to the microwave port after running the
queue scheduling algorithm. When modulation scheme switching occurs, certain queues
may be congested due to insufficient capacity at the air interface. As a result, certain services
or all the services in these queues are discarded.

Figure 6-1 shows the change in services brought by the AM technology. The orange part
indicates E1 services. The blue part indicates packet services. The closer the service is to the
outside of the cylinder in the figure, the lower the service priority. Under all channel conditions,
the service capacity varies according to the modulation scheme. When the channel conditions
are unfavorable (during adverse weather conditions), lower-priority services are discarded.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-1 Adaptive modulation

256QAM
128QAM
64QAM
32QAM
16QAM

QPSK
16QAM

Channel
Capability

32QAM
64QAM
128QAM

E1 Services
256QAM

Ethernet
Services

The AM technology used by the OptiX RTN 910 has the following characteristics:
l

The AM technology uses the QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and 256QAM
modulation schemes.

The lowest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called reference scheme or modulation


scheme of guaranteed capacity) and the highest-efficiency modulation scheme (also called
nominal scheme or modulation scheme of full capacity) used by the AM can be configured.

In AM, when modulation schemes are switched, the transmit frequency, receive frequency,
and channel spacing remain unchanged.

In AM, modulation schemes are switched step-by-step.

In AM, modulation scheme switching is hitless. When the modulation scheme is


downshifted, high-priority services will not be affected when low-priority services are
discarded. The switching is successful even when 100 dB/s channel fast fading occurs.

6.1.2 CCDP and XPIC


The co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) and cross-polarization interference cancellation
(XPIC) technologies are developed based on microwave polarization characteristics. CCDP,
wherein two signals are transmitted over two orthogonal polarization waves, doubles the
transmission capacity. XPIC cancels the cross-polarization interference between the two
polarization waves.
Microwave transmission can be classified into single-polarized transmission and CCDP
transmission by polarization transmission mode.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

In single-polarized transmission, a signal is transmitted over the horizontally polarized


wave or the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 6-2.

In CCDP transmission, two signals are transmitted over the horizontally polarized wave
and the vertically polarized wave on the same channel, as shown in Figure 6-3.

The capacity in CCDP transmission mode is twice the capacity in single-polarized transmission
mode.
Figure 6-2 Single-polarized transmission

Figure 6-3 CCDP transmission

The ideal situation of CCDP transmission is that no interference exists between the two
orthogonal signals that operate at the same frequency, and then the receiver can easily recover
the two signals. In actual engineering conditions, however, regardless of the orthogonality of
the two signals, certain interference between the signals exists, due to cross-polarization
discrimination (XPD) of the antenna and channel deterioration. To cancel the interference, the
XPIC technology is used to receive and process the signals in the horizontal and vertical
directions so that the original signals are recovered.

6.1.3 RF Configuration Modes


The OptiX RTN 910 supports five RF configuration modes, namely, 1+0 non-protection
configuration, 2+0 non-protection configuration, 1+1 protection configuration, N+1 protection
configuration, and cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) configuration.

1+0 Non-Protection Configuration


The 1+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and
no protection channel.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

2+0 Non-Protection Configuration


The 2+0 non-protection configuration indicates that the radio link has 2 working channels and
no protection channel.

1+1 Protection Configuration


The 1+1 protection configuration indicates that the radio link has one working channel and one
protection channel.
The 1+1 protection configuration is classified into 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD.
l

In 1+1 HSB protection mode, the equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby configuration for
the IF boards and ODUs at both ends of each hop of radio link, implementing the protection.

In 1+1 FD protection mode, the system uses two channels with a specific frequency interval
to transmit and receive the same service signal. The opposite end selects one from the two
received signals. With the 1+1 FD protection, the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
The 1+1 FD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.

In the 1+1 SD protection mode, the system uses two antennas with a space distance to
receive the same RF signal. The equipment selects from the two received signals. With the
1+1 SD protection, the impact of the fading on signal transmission is reduced.
The 1+1 SD protection also supports the 1+1 HSB protection.

N+1 Protection Configuration


The N+1 protection configuration indicates that the radio link has N working channels and one
protection channel.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports N+1 protection only in STM-1 radio and Integrated IP radio. The
N+1 protection is implemented through the N+1 MSP similar to l:N linear MSP.
The OptiX RTN 910 supports N+1 protection (N=1).

XPIC Configuration
The XPIC adopts both the horizontally polarized wave and the vertically polarized wave over
one channel to transmit two channels of signals. The radio link capacity in XPIC configuration
is double the radio link capacity in 1+0 configuration.
The OptiX RTN 910 only supports the XPIC configuration for Integrated IP radio.

6.1.4 PLA
Physical link aggregation (PLA) aggregates all Ethernet bandwidths in several Integrated IP
radio links between two NEs into a logical Ethernet path for higher Ethernet bandwidth. Using
PLA can effectively improve the bandwidth and reliability for transmitting Ethernet services
over Integrated IP radio links.
As shown in Figure 6-4, PLA allows all Ethernet transmission paths in several Integrated IP
radio links connected to the same equipment to be aggregated as a PLA group. For MAC users,
a PLA group works as a single link.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

Native TDM services on the Integrated IP radio links are irrelevant to the PLA.

Different from air-interface LAG, PLA dynamically allocates Ethernet traffic based on the real
time Ethernet bandwidth over each member radio link to achieve almost the same Ethernet
bandwidth utilization on member radio links. Except being free from impacts of the Ethernet
frame type and packet length, the load sharing mechanism used by PLA even does not require
the same Ethernet bandwidth on radio links involved. Moreover, this load sharing mechanism
is also able to ensure almost the same Ethernet bandwidth utilization on member links when the
Ethernet bandwidth changes differently on each member link.
Figure 6-4 PLA
Radio link 1
Native TDM Channel
Ethernet
Channel

Physical
Link
Aggregation

Ethernet
Channel
Native TDM Channel
Radio link 2

PLA helps to improve Ethernet service bandwidth utilization and reliability in integrated IP radio
mode when air-interface LAG does not apply (for example, when member radio links provide
different Ethernet bandwidths or the load sharing algorithm used by air-interface LAG cannot
implement load balancing between member radio links).
NOTE

l The member links in a PLA group must be carried by the same type of IF board (ISU2 or ISX2).
l In the current version, PLA aggregates only two links, which means that a PLA group can contain only one
main port and one slave port. The IF boards where the main and slave ports are located must be installed in
two paired slots.

6.2 Configuration Procedure


The configuration procedures of different radio link configuration methods are different.
Figure 6-5 provides the procedures for configuring radio links.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-5 Configuration flowchart (radio links)


Configure TDM radio links (with
XPIC function)

Configure TDM radio links


(without XPIC function)

Configure IP radio links (with XPIC


function)

Configure IP radio links (without


XPIC function)

Start

Start

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Create XPIC working


groups

Configure IF
IF 1+1
1+1
Configure
protection
protection

Create XPIC working


groups

Configure IF 1+1
protection

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure ODU power


attributes

Configure ATPC function

Create radio links by


using the search
method

Configure ODU power


attributes

End

Configure N+1 protection

Create radio links by


using the search
method

End

Start

Configure AM attributes
for XPIC function

Start

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure IF/ODU
information for radio links

Configure ATPC function

Configure AM advanced
attributes

Configure AM advanced
attributes

Configure ODU power


attributes

Configuring physical link


aggregation (PLA)

Create radio links by


using the search
method

Configure ODU power


attributes

Configuring physical link


aggregation (PLA)

Configure N+1 protection

Compulsory
End
Optional

Create radio links by


using the search
method

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Procedure for Configuring TDM Radio Links (with the XPIC Function Enabled)
Table 6-1 Procedure for configuring TDM radio links (with the XPIC function enabled)
Operation

Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/


ODU Information of a
Radio Link

For the ISX2, set IF Service Type for the IF boards in both
the vertically and horizontally polarized directions of an XPIC
workgroup according to the plan.
NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

A.3.2 Creating an XPIC


Workgroup

Required.

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/


ODU Information of a
Radio Link

Required.

A.6.10.3 Setting ODU


Power Attributes

Optional.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical


Fibers by Using the Search
Method

In normal cases, the main topology displays the previously


created radio links.

Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal level


specified in the network plan. The antenna non-alignment
indication function can be enabled only after this parameter is
set. When the antenna non-alignment indication function is
enabled, the ODU indicator on the IF board connected to the
ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off) if the actual
receive power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received. This indicates that the antenna is not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for consecutive 30
minutes, the NE automatically disables the antenna nonalignment indication function.

TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low Threshold(dBm), RX


High Threshold(dBm), and RX Low Threshold(dBm)
affect only the performance events associated with ATPC.
Therefore, determine whether to set these parameters
according to the actual requirements.

NOTE

l During the site commissioning, you can configure the two XPIC links as two separate non-XPIC links.
l The preceding parameters need to be set to the same values, separately for the radio links in the vertical and
horizontal polarization directions.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Procedure for Configuring TDM Radio Links (with the XPIC Function Disabled)
Table 6-2 Procedure for configuring TDM radio links (with the XPIC function disabled)
Operation

Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/


ODU Information of a
Radio Link

For the ISU2 and ISX2, set IF Service Type to SDH.

A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1


Protection Groupa

Required when the radio links are configured with 1+1


protection.

NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).

Set the parameters according to the network plan.


A.3.4 Configuring the IF/
ODU Information of a
Radio Linka

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set Work Mode and Link ID according to the network
plan.
l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing(MHz), and TX
Power(dBm) according to the network plan.
l Set TX Status to unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received signal
level specified in the network plan. The antenna nonalignment indication function can be enabled only after this
parameter is set. When the antenna non-alignment
indication function is enabled, the ODU indicator on the
IF board connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,
300 ms off) if the actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be received. This
indicates that the antenna is not aligned. After the antennas
are aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE
automatically disables the antenna non-alignment
indication function.

A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC


Attributesa

Required when the ATPC function needs to be used.


l If the ATPC function needs to be used, set ATPC Enable
Status to Enabled.
l During site commissioning, set ATPC Enable Status to
Disabled.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper Threshold
(dBm) to the central value plus 10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Lower Threshold
(dBm) to the central value minus 10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status to Disabled.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation

Description

A.6.10.3 Setting ODU


Power Attributesa

Optional.
l To set the maximum transmit power allowed by the ATPC
adjustment function, you need to set Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm) according to the actual requirements.
l TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low Threshold(dBm),
RX High Threshold(dBm), and RX Low Threshold
(dBm) affect only the performance events associated with
ATPC. Therefore, determine whether to set these
parameters according to the actual requirements.

A.3.6 Creating an N+1


Protection Group

Required when the radio links are configured with N+1


protection.
Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group to the same
values for the equipment at both ends.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical


Fibers by Using the Search
Method

In normal cases, the main topology displays the previously


created radio links.

NOTE

l a: Generally, during the site commissioning, the previous steps are completed. After the site commissioning,
however, you need to reset ATPC Enable Status.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the
main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l For TDM radio links configured with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU information
on each link. Work Mode must be configured as 7, STM-1, 28MHz, 128QAM.

Procedure for Configuring Integrated IP radio Links (with the XPIC Function
Enabled)
Table 6-3 Procedure for configuring Integrated IP radio links (with the XPIC function enabled)
Operation

Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU


Information of a Radio Link

For the ISX2, set IF Service Type for the IF boards in


both the vertically and horizontally polarized
directions of an XPIC workgroup according to the plan.
NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH).

A.3.2 Creating an XPIC


Workgroup

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Required.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation

Description

A.3.3 Setting the AM Attributes


of the XPIC Workgroup

Required.

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU


Information of a Radio Link

Required.

Set the parameters according to the network plan. The


parameters in both polarization directions need to take
the same values.

l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the received


signal level specified in the network plan. The
antenna non-alignment indication function can be
enabled only after this parameter is set. When the
antenna non-alignment indication function is
enabled, the ODU indicator on the IF board
connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on,
300 ms off) if the actual receive power of the ODU
is 3 dB lower than the power expected to be
received. This indicates that the antenna is not
aligned. After the antennas are aligned for
consecutive 30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna non-alignment indication
function.
l To enable the E1 priority function, set Enable E1
Priority to Enabled. In addition, set Guarantee
E1 Capacity and Full E1 Capacity according to
the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.6.9.3 Setting Advanced AM


Attributes

Optional.

A.6.10.3 Setting ODU Power


Attributes

Optional.

To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be


transmitted in intermediate modulation schemes,
adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network plan. Generally, it is
recommended that you use the default values.

TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low Threshold


(dBm), RX High Threshold(dBm), and RX Low
Threshold(dBm) affect only the performance events
associated with ATPC. Therefore, determine whether
to set these parameters according to the actual
requirements.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation
Configuring
physical link
aggregation
(PLA)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Description
A.3.12 Creating
a PLA Group

Required when an XPIC workgroup consisting of the


ISX2 needs to use the PLA feature.
Set PLA-associated parameters according to the
network plan.
NOTE
l In V100R003C03, PLA aggregates only two links, which
means that a PLA group can contain only one main port
and one slave port. The IF boards where the main and
slave ports are located must be installed in two paired
slots.
l IF boards are reset (cold) during creation or deletion of a
PLA group.
l PLA can work together with adaptive modulation (AM).
Member links in a PLA group can use different Hybrid/
AM attributes and modulation modes.
l The two members of an XPIC workgroup can form a PLA
group, providing Ethernet service protection between the
vertical and horizontal polarization directions.
l Native TDM services in Integrated IP radio links are
irrelevant to the PLA group consisting of the Integrated
IP radio links, and need to be configured separately on the
Integrated IP radio links.

A.3.13 Querying
the Status of a
PLA Group

Set Minimum Active Links according to the network


plan. Generally, it is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
When PLA and Ethernet ring protection switching
(ERPS) coexist and Minimum Active Links is not 1,
ERPS switching can be triggered if some member links
in the PLA group fail.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers


by Using the Search Method

In normal cases, the main topology displays the


previously created radio links.

NOTE

l During the site commissioning, you can configure the two XPIC links as two separate non-XPIC links
according to Table 6-4.
l The preceding parameters need to be set to the same values, separately for the radio links in the vertical and
horizontal polarization directions.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the E1 count, AM enabled status, 1588 timeslot enabled
status, modulation scheme, or STM-1 count is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.
Clear this alarm immediately. Otherwise, service configurations may be applied unsuccessfully or services
may be interrupted.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Procedure for Configuring Integrated IP radio links (with the XPIC Function
Disabled)
Table 6-4 Procedure for configuring Integrated IP radio links (with the XPIC function disabled)
Operation

Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU


Information of a Radio Link

For the ISU2 and ISX2, set IF Service Type


according to the plan.
NOTE
The default value of IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
E1+ETH).

A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection


Groupa

Required when the radio links are configured with


IF 1+1 protection.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation

Description

A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU


Information of a Radio Linka

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set AM Enable Status and IF Channel
Bandwidth according to the network plan.
l When the AM function is enabled on the radio
links, set Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity and Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity according to
the network plan.
l When the AM function is disabled on the radio
links, set Manually Specified Modulation
Mode according to the network plan.
l During site commissioning, set AM Enable
Status to Disabled. In addition, set Manually
Specified Modulation Mode to Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity that is
planned.
l Set Full E1 Capacity and Link ID according
to the network plan.
l Set TX Frequency(MHz), T/R Spacing
(MHz), and TX Power(dBm) according to
the network plan.
l Set TX Status to unmute.
l Set Power to Be Received(dBm) to the
received signal level specified in the network
planning information. The antenna nonalignment indication function can be enabled
only after this parameter is set. When the
antenna non-alignment indication function is
enabled, the ODU indicator on the IF board
connected to the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms
on, 300 ms off) if the actual receive power of
the ODU is 3 dB lower than the power
expected to be received. This indicates that the
antenna is not aligned. After the antennas are
aligned for consecutive 30 minutes, the NE
automatically disables the antenna nonalignment indication function.
l To enable the E1 priority function, set Enable
E1 Priority to Enabled. In addition, set
Guarantee E1 Capacity and Full E1
Capacity according to the network plan.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Operation

Description

A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributesa

Required when the ATPC function needs to be


used.
l If the ATPC function needs to be used, set
ATPC Enable Status to Enabled.
l During site commissioning, set ATPC Enable
Status to Disabled.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) to the central value plus 10
dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm) to the central value minus
10 dB.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status to
Disabled.

A.6.9.3 Setting Advanced AM


Attributesa

Optional.

A.6.10.3 Setting ODU Power


Attributesa

Optional.

To ensure that a specific number of E1s can be


transmitted in intermediate modulation schemes,
adjust the E1 capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning information.
Generally, it is recommended that you use the
default values.

l To set the maximum transmit power allowed


by the ATPC adjustment function, you need to
set Maximum Transmit Power(dBm)
according to the actual requirements.
l TX High Threshold(dBm), TX Low
Threshold(dBm), RX High Threshold
(dBm), and RX Low Threshold(dBm) affect
only the performance events associated with
ATPC. Therefore, determine whether to set
these parameters according to the actual
requirements.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation
Configuring
PLA

6 Configuring Radio Links

Description
A.3.12 Creating a
PLA Group

Required when the ISU2/ISX2 needs to use the


PLA feature.
Set PLA-associated parameters according to the
network plan.
NOTE
l In V100R003C03, PLA aggregates only two links,
which means that a PLA group can contain only one
main port and one slave port. The IF boards where
the main and slave ports are located must be
installed in two paired slots.
l IF boards are reset (cold) during creation or deletion
of a PLA group.
l PLA can work together with adaptive modulation
(AM). Member links in a PLA group can use
different Hybrid/AM attributes and modulation
modes.
l Native TDM services in Integrated IP radio links
are irrelevant to the PLA group consisting of the
Integrated IP radio links, and need to be configured
separately on the Integrated IP radio links.

A.3.13 Querying the


Status of a PLA
Group

Set Minimum Active Links according to the


network plan. Generally, it is recommended that
this parameter takes the default value.
NOTE
When PLA and ERPS coexist and Minimum Active
Links is not 1, ERPS switching can be triggered if some
member links in the PLA group fail.

A.3.6 Creating an N+1 Protection


Group

Required when the radio links are configured with


N+1 protection.
Set the attributes of the N+1 protection group to
the same values for the equipment at both ends.
Set the parameters according to the network plan.

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by


Using the Search Method

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

In normal cases, the main topology displays the


previously created radio links.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

l a: Generally, during the site commissioning, the previous steps are completed. After the site commissioning,
however, you need to reset AM Enable Status and ATPC Enable Status.
l For radio links configured with 1+1 HSB/SD, you need to configure the IF and ODU information on the
main radio link only. For radio links configured with 1+1 FD, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on the main radio link and the ODU information on the standby radio link.
l To configure Integrated IP radio links with N+1 protection, you need to configure the IF and ODU
information on each link.
l The MW_CFG_MISMATCH alarm is reported if the E1 count, AM enabled status, 1588 timeslot enabled
status, modulation mode, or STM-1 count is set inconsistently for both ends of an Integrated IP radio link.
Clear this alarm immediately. Otherwise, service configurations may be applied unsuccessfully or services
may be interrupted.

6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio


Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a TDM radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the planning information.

6.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 5.3 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Chain Network Topology), configure the
TDM radio links according to the following network planning information (as shown in Figure
6-6):
l

The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-5.


Table 6-5 Service capacity accessed by each BTS
BTS

BTS11

BTS12

BTS13

BTS14

BTS15

Number of
E1 services

16

14

To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE11
and NE12 are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group.

The ATPC function is enabled to reduce inter-site interference.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-6 Networking diagram (TDM radio chain network)


102
14952M
14532M
16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0
H-polarization

BTS12

BTS13

Tx high

104
14930M
14510M
8E1,7M,16QAM
1+0
H-polarzation

NE12

NE11

Tx low

NE14
Tx high

Tx high
Tx low

NE16

NE13

101
14930M
14510M
STM-1,28M,128QAM
1+1 HSB
V-polarzation

NE15

Tx low

Tx low
103
14967M
14547M
22E1,14M,32QAM
1+0
V-polarization

Tx high

Third party
SDH network

BTS11

BTS14
BTS15

Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Radio work mode
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-6 are described as follows.
Table 6-6 Connections of radio links (NE11)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE11 and NE12

3-IF1 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 6-7 Connections of radio links (NE12)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE12 and NE11

3-IF1 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-IF1 (standby IF board)

Table 6-8 Connections of radio links (NE13)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE13 and NE14

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE13 and NE15

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-9 Connections of radio links (NE14)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE14 and NE13

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-10 Connections of radio links (NE15)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE15 and NE13

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE15 and NE16

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-11 Connections of radio links (NE16)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE16 and NE15

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.3.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information about the radio links, as provided in Table
6-12.
Table 6-12 Basic information about radio links

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link ID

101

102

103

104

Tx high site

NE11

NE14

NE15

NE15

Tx low site

NE12

NE13

NE13

NE16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Tx frequency at
the Tx high site
(MHz)

14930

14952

14967

14930

Tx frequency at
the Tx low site
(MHz)

14510

14532

14547

14510

T/R spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

Radio working
mode

STM-1,
28MHz,
128QAM

16E1, 14MHz,
16QAM

22E1, 14MHz,
32QAM

8E1, 7MHz,
16QAM

RF
configuration
mode

1+1 HSB

1+0

1+0

1+0

Polarization
direction

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

NOTE

l To prevent interference on a microwave site, it is recommended that you plan the microwave site as
only a TX high site or a TX low site at a time.
l To prevent interference between two radio links on a microwave site that use transmit frequencies with
a small spacing between, it is recommended that you set the two radio links to operate in different
polarization directions.
l The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the availability of services and parameters of radio links. Then, you can obtain the power and
ATPC information of the radio links as provided in Table 6-13.
Table 6-13 Power and ATPC information

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Transmit power
(dBm)

5 (NE11)

10 (NE13)

10 (NE13)

15 (NE15)

5 (NE12)

10 (NE14)

10 (NE15)

15 (NE16)

Receive power
(dBm)

-42 (NE11)

-44 (NE13)

-43 (NE13)

-48 (NE15)

-42 (NE12)

-44 (NE14)

-43 (NE15)

-48 (NE16)

ATPC enabling

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

ATPC
automatic
threshold
enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Upper threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

-32 (NE11)

-34 (NE13)

-33 (NE13)

-38 (NE15)

-32 (NE12)

-34 (NE14)

-33 (NE15)

-38 (NE16)

Lower threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

-52 (NE11)

-54 (NE13)

-53 (NE13)

-58 (NE15)

-52 (NE12)

-54 (NE14)

-53 (NE15)

-58 (NE16)

Maximum
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l In this example, the ATPC is enabled to reduce the inter-site interference. The ATPC may be disabled if
there is no such a requirement.
l The ATPC controls the receive power within a range, namely, (2 dB more or less than the central value
between the upper threshold and lower threshold of ATPC adjustment). Hence, this example sets the upper
threshold to 10 dB higher than the receive power, and the lower threshold is 10 dB lower than the receive
power.
l The maximum transmit power is the actual maximum transmit power of the ODU after the ATPC is enabled.
When this parameter is not specified, the value of the parameter is the rated maximum transmit power of
the ODU. If the ODU works at the rated maximum transmit power, the electromagnetic wave agrees with
the spectrum configuration profile. Hence, this parameter is not set generally.

Information of IF Boards
According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information of IF boards as provided in Table 6-14.
Table 6-14 Information of IF boards
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Main IF board

3-IF1 (NE11)

3-IF1 (NE13)

4-IF1 (NE13)

3-IF1 (NE15)

3-IF1 (NE12)

3-IF1 (NE14)

4-IF1 (NE15)

3-IF1 (NE16)

4-IF1 (NE11)

Standby IF
board

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

4-IF1 (NE12)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

RF
configuration
mode

1+1 HSB

1+0

1+0

1+0

Revertive mode

Revertive
(default value)

WTR time(s)

600 (default
value)

Reverse
switching
enabling

Disabled

Alarm report
mode

Alarm reporting
by protection
group

Anti-jitter time

300s (default
value)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you configure the IF board in slot 3 as the main IF board when configuring a 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection group.
l In 1+1 HSB configuration, it is recommended that you disable the reverse switching function. In 1+1 SD
configuration, it is recommended that you enable the reverse switching function.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that alarms be reported by protection group.
l Unless otherwise specified the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take default values.

6.3.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE11 and NE12.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE11

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Working Mode

HSB

Revertive Mode

Revertive mode

WTR Time(s)

600

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
NE11

Enable Reverse Switching

Disabled

Working Board

3-IF1

Protection Board

4-IF1

Alarm Report Mode

Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s)

300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE12

Working Mode

HSB

Revertive Mode

Revertive mode

WTR Time(s)

600

Enable Reverse Switching

Disabled

Working Board

3-IF1

Protection Board

4-IF1

Alarm Report Mode

Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s)

300

Step 2 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Work Mode

7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM

Link ID

101

TX Frequency(MHz)

14930

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

TX Status

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Work Mode

7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM

Link ID

101

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-42

TX Status

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode

6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM

8,22E1,14MHz,32QAM

Link ID

102

103

TX Frequency(MHz)

14532

14547

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

10

10

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-44

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Work Mode

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Link ID

102

TX Frequency(MHz)

14952

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

10

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-44

TX Status

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode

4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM

8,22E1,14MHz,32QAM

Link ID

104

103

TX Frequency(MHz)

14930

14967

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

15

10

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-48

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Work Mode

4,8E1,7MHz,16QAM

Link ID

104

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

15

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-48

TX Status

unmute

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Step 3 See A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-32

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-52

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable


Status

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-32

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-52

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable


Status

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold


(dBm)

-34

-33

ATPC Lower Threshold


(dBm)

-54

-53

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-34

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-54

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable


Status

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold


(dBm)

-38

-33

ATPC Lower Threshold


(dBm)

-58

-53

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold(dBm)

-38

ATPC Lower Threshold(dBm)

-58

ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable


Status

Disabled

Step 4 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio


Ring Network)
This section considers TDM radio links on a TDM radio ring network as examples to describe
how to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 5.4 Configuration Example (TDM Radio Ring Network Topology), configure the
TDM radio links according to the network planning information (as shown in Figure 6-7):
l

The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-15.


Table 6-15 Service capacity accessed by each BTS
BTS

BTS21

BTS22

BTS23

BTS24

Number of E1
services

All the radio links is configured with 1+0 non-protection.

The ATPC function is enabled to reduce inter-site interference.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-7 Networking diagram (TDM radio ring network)


Third party
SDH network
201
14930M
14510M
16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0
V-polarzation

NE21

Tx high

BTS21
NE22

Tx high

Tx low

Tx low

Tx low

Tx low
Tx high

BTS22

204
14958M
14538M
16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0
V-polarization

202
14958M
14538M
16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0
H-polarization

NE24

BTS24

Tx high
203
14930M
14510M
16E1,14M,16QAM
1+0
H-polarzation

4E1
NE23
BTS23
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Radio work mode
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-7 are described as follows.
Table 6-16 Connections of radio links (NE21)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE21 and NE22

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE21 and NE24

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-17 Connections of radio links (NE22)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE22 and NE21

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Link

Port

Description

Between NE22 and NE23

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-18 Connections of radio links (NE23)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE23 and NE22

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE23 and NE24

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-19 Connections of radio links (NE24)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE24 and NE21

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE24 and NE23

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.4.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information about the radio links as provided in Table 6-20.
Table 6-20 Basic information about radio links

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link ID

201

202

203

204

Tx high site

NE21

NE23

NE23

NE21

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Tx low site

NE22

NE22

NE24

NE24

Tx frequency at
the Tx high site
(MHz)

14930

14958

14930

14958

Tx frequency at
the Tx low site
(MHz)

14510

14538

14510

14538

T/R spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

Radio working
mode

16E1, 14MHz,
16QAM

16E1, 14MHz,
16QAM

16E1, 14MHz,
16QAM

16E1, 14MHz,
16QAM

RF
configuration
mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

1+0

Polarization
direction

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

V (vertical
polarization)

NOTE

The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the availability of services and parameters of radio links. Then, you can obtain the power and
ATPC information about the radio links, as provided in Table 6-21.
Table 6-21 Power and ATPC information

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Transmit power
(dBm)

9 (NE21)

10 (NE23)

10 (NE23)

8 (NE21)

9 (NE22)

10 (NE22)

10 (NE24)

8 (NE24)

Receive power
(dBm)

-46 (NE21)

-44 (NE23)

-43 (NE23)

-47 (NE21)

-46 (NE22)

-44 (NE22)

-43 (NE24)

-47 (NE24)

ATPC enabling

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC
automatic
threshold
enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Upper threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

-36 (NE21)

-34 (NE23)

-33 (NE23)

-37 (NE21)

-36 (NE22)

-34 (NE22)

-33 (NE24)

-37 (NE24)

Lower threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

-56 (NE21)

-54 (NE23)

-53 (NE23)

-57 (NE21)

-56 (NE22)

-54 (NE22)

-53 (NE24)

-57 (NE24)

Maximum
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l In this example, the ATPC is enabled to reduce the inter-site interference. The ATPC may be disabled if
there is no such a requirement.
l The ATPC controls the receive power within a range, namely, (2 dB more or less than the central value of
the upper threshold and lower threshold of ATPC adjustment). Hence, this example sets the upper threshold
to 10 dB higher than the receive power, and the lower threshold is 10 dB lower than the receive power.
l The maximum transmit power is the actual maximum transmit power of the ODU after the ATPC is enabled.
When this parameter is not specified, the value of the parameter is the rated maximum transmit power of
the ODU. If the ODU works at the rated maximum transmit power, the electromagnetic wave agrees with
the spectrum configuration profile. Hence, this parameter is not set generally.

Information About IF Boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information about IF boards as provided in Table 6-22.
Table 6-22 Information of IF boards

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Main IF board

4-IF1 (NE21)

4-IF1 (NE22)

4-IF1 (NE23)

4-IF1 (NE24)

3-IF1 (NE22)

3-IF1 (NE23)

3-IF1 (NE24)

3-IF1 (NE21)

Standby IF
board

RF
configuration
mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

1+0

Revertive mode

WTR time(s)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Reverse
switching
enabling

Alarm report
mode

Anti-jitter time

6.4.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode

6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM

6,16E1,14MHz,16QAM

Link ID

204

201

TX Frequency(MHz)

14958

14930

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-47

-46

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode

6, 16E1,14MHz, 16QAM

6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

Link ID

201

202

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

14538

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

TX Power(dBm)

10

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-46

-44

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode

6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

Link ID

202

203

TX Frequency(MHz)

14958

14930

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

10

10

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-44

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

Work Mode

6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

6, 16E1, 14MHz, 16QAM

Link ID

203

204

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

14538

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

10

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-43

-47

TX Status

unmute

unmute

Step 2 See A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold


(dBm)

-37

-36

ATPC Lower Threshold


(dBm)

-57

-56

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold


(dBm)

-36

-34

ATPC Lower Threshold


(dBm)

-56

-54

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold


(dBm)

-34

-33

ATPC Lower Threshold


(dBm)

-54

-53

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-IF1 and 23-ODU

4-IF1 and 24-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

ATPC Upper Threshold


(dBm)

-33

-37

ATPC Lower Threshold


(dBm)

-53

-57

ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status

Disabled

Disabled

Step 3 A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End

6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid


Radio Chain Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio chain network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 5.5 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Chain Network), configure the Hybrid
radio links according to the following network planning information (as shown in Figure 6-8):
l

Each Hybrid radio link transmits E1 services and Ethernet services. The AM function is
enabled on each link.

To improve transmission reliability of important services, the radio links between NE11
and NE12 are configured as a 1+1 HSB protection group.

The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-23.


Table 6-23 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

BTS

BTS11

BTS12

BTS13

BTS14

BTS15

Number of
highpriority E1s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

BTS

BTS11

BTS12

BTS13

BTS14

BTS15

Number of
low-priority
E1s

Capacity of
highpriority
Ethernet
services
(Mbit/s)

10

Capacity of
low-priority
Ethernet
services
(Mbit/s)

35

15

24

20

19

NOTE

High-priority services are guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources and are not discarded even in
the case of an AM switch. Low-priority services are not guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources
and may be discarded in the case of an AM switch. The common service priorities are provided in Table
6-24.

Table 6-24 Common service priorities

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Service Type

Service Class

TDM E1s that transmit 2G base station


services

High-priority services

ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that


transmit 3G base station services

High-priority services

E1s (of a bandwidth not lower than the


high-priority service bandwidth) in the
IMA E1 group that transmits 3G base
station services

High-priority service

Other E1s in the IMA E1 group that


transmits 3G base station services

Low-priority services

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet


services

High-priority services

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low-priority services

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-8 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio chain network)


102
14952M
14532M
14M
1+0
H-polarization

BTS12

BTS13

Tx high

104
14930M
14510M
7M
1+0
H-polarzation

NE13

NE12

NE11

Tx low

NE14

Tx low

Tx high

Tx high
Tx low

NE16

101
14930M
14510M
28M
1+1 HSB
V-polarzation

NE15

103
14967M
14547M
14M
1+0
V-polarization

BTS14
BTS15

Tx low

Tx high

Packet
network

BTS11
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-8 are described as follows.
Table 6-25 Connections of radio links (NE11)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE11 and NE12

3-ISU2 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 6-26 Connections of radio links (NE12)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE12 and NE11

3-ISU2 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 6-27 Connections of radio links (NE13)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE13 and NE14

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE13 and NE15

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-28 Connections of radio links (NE14)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE14 and NE13

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-29 Connections of radio links (NE15)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE15 and NE13

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE15 and NE16

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-30 Connections of radio links (NE16)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE16 and NE15

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.5.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information of the radio links, as provided in Table 6-31.
Table 6-31 Basic information about radio links

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link ID

101

102

103

104

Tx high site

NE11

NE14

NE15

NE15

Tx low site

NE12

NE13

NE13

NE16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Tx frequency at
the Tx high site
(MHz)

14930

14952

14967

14930

Tx frequency at
the Tx low site
(MHz)

14510

14532

14547

14510

T/R spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

Channel
spacing (MHz)

28

14

14

RF
configuration
mode

1+1 HSB

1+0

1+0

1+0

Polarization
direction

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

NOTE

The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information


According to the capacity of E1 and Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can
calculate the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 6-32.
Table 6-32 Hybrid/AM attribute information

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Number of E1s
in AM
guaranteed
capacity mode

Number of E1s
in AM full
capacity mode

Capacity of
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Capacity of lowpriority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

113

39

39

19

AM enabling

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

AM guaranteed
capacity mode

QPSK

QPSK

QPSK

QPSK

AM full
capacity mode

128QAM

32QAM

64QAM

32QAM

E1 priority
enabling

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Disabled

NOTE

The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function require the proper license file.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the parameters of radio links and obtain the power and ATPC information of the radio links, as
provided in Table 6-33.
Table 6-33 Power and ATPC information

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Transmit power
(dBm)

16.5 (NE11)

16.5 (NE13)

16 (NE13)

20 (NE15)

16.5 (NE12)

16.5 (NE14)

16 (NE15)

20 (NE16)

Receive power
(dBm)

-46 (NE11)

-44 (NE13)

-43 (NE13)

-48 (NE15)

-46 (NE12)

-44 (NE14)

-43 (NE15)

-48 (NE16)

ATPC enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

ATPC
automatic
threshold
enabling

Upper threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Lower threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.


l The receive power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Information About IF Boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information about IF boards, as provided in Table 6-34.
Table 6-34 Information about IF boards

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Main IF board

3-ISU2 (NE11)

3-ISU2 (NE13)

4-ISU2 (NE13)

3-ISU2 (NE15)

3-ISU2 (NE12)

3-ISU2 (NE14)

4-ISU2 (NE15)

3-ISU2 (NE16)

Standby IF
board

4-ISU2 (NE11)

RF
configuration
mode

1+1 HSB

1+0

1+0

1+0

Revertive mode

Revertive
(default value)

WTR time(s)

600 (default
value)

Reverse
switching
enabling

Disabled

Alarm report
mode

Alarm reporting
by protection
group

4-ISU2 (NE12)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Anti-jitter time

300s (default
value)

NOTE

l It is recommended that you configure the IF board in slot 3 as the main IF board when configuring a 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection group.
l In 1+1 HSB configuration, it is recommended that you disable the reverse switching function. In 1+1 SD
configuration, it is recommended that you enable the reverse switching function.
l Unless otherwise specified, it is recommended that alarms be reported by protection group.
l Unless otherwise specified the other parameters of the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD all take default values.

6.5.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.1 Creating an IF 1+1 Protection Group and create the IF 1+1 protection groups for
NE11 and NE12.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE11

Working Mode

HSB

Revertive Mode

Revertive mode

WTR Time(s)

600

Enable Reverse Switching

Disabled

Working Board

3-ISU2

Protection Board

4-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode

Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s)

300

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE12

Working Mode
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

HSB

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
NE12

Revertive Mode

Revertive mode

WTR Time(s)

600

Enable Reverse Switching

Disabled

Working Board

3-ISU2

Protection Board

4-ISU2

Alarm Report Mode

Only Protection group alarms

Anti-jitter Time(s)

300

Step 2 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link ID

101

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

28M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM


Capacity

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the Full AM


Capacity

128QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14930

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

16.5

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-46

TX Status

unmute

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID

101

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

28M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM


Capacity

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the Full AM


Capacity

128QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

16.5

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-46

TX Status

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID

102

103

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

32QAM

64QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Enabled

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14532

14547

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

16.5

16

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-44

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID

102

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM


Capacity

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the Full AM


Capacity

32QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14952

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

16.5

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-44

TX Status

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID

104

103

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

7M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

32QAM

64QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Enabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14930

14967

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

20

16

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-48

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link ID

104

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

7M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM


Capacity

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the Full AM


Capacity

32QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

20

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-48

TX Status

unmute

Step 3 See A.6.9.1 Setting IF Attributes and set the IF attributes.


l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot

Disabled

Step 4 See A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

ATPC Enable Status

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value

ATPC Enable Status

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

Step 5 A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End

6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid


Radio Ring Network)
This section considers radio links on a Hybrid radio ring network as examples to describe how
to configure radio links according to the network planning information.

6.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 5.6 Configuration Example (Hybrid Radio Ring Network), configure the Hybrid
radio links according to the network planning information (as shown in Figure 6-9):
l

Each Hybrid radio link transmits E1 services and Ethernet services. The AM function is
enabled on each link.

All the radio links is configured with 1+0 non-protection.

The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 6-35.


Table 6-35 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

BTS

BTS21

BTS22

BTS23

BTS24

Number of
high-priority
E1s

Number of
low-priority
E1s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

BTS

BTS21

BTS22

BTS23

BTS24

Capacity of
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

Capacity of
low-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

10

10

10

10

NOTE

High-priority services are guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources and are not discarded even in
the case of an AM switch. Low-priority services are not guaranteed with sufficient transmission resources
and may be discarded in the case of an AM switch. The common service priorities are provided in Table
6-36.

Table 6-36 Common service priorities

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Service Type

Service Class

TDM E1s that transmit 2G base station


services

High-priority services

ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that


transmit 3G base station services

High-priority services

E1s (of a bandwidth not lower than the


high-priority service bandwidth) in the
IMA E1 group that transmits 3G base
station services

High-priority service

Other E1s in the IMA E1 group that


transmits 3G base station services

Low-priority services

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet


services

High-priority services

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low-priority services

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-9 Networking diagram (Hybrid radio ring network)


Packet
network

201
14930M
14510M
14M
1+0
V-polarzation

NE21

Tx high

BTS21
NE22

Tx high

Tx low

Tx low

Tx low

Tx low
Tx high

BTS22

204
14958M
14538M
14M
1+0
V-polarization

202
14958M
14538M
14M
1+0
H-polarization

NE24

BTS24

Tx high
203
14930M
14510M
14M
1+0
H-polarzation

4E1
NE23
BTS23
Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-9 are described as follows.
Table 6-37 Connections of radio links (NE21)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE21 and NE22

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE21 and NE24

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-38 Connections of radio links (NE22)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE22 and NE21

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Link

Port

Description

Between NE22 and NE23

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-39 Connections of radio links (NE23)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE23 and NE22

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE23 and NE24

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 6-40 Connections of radio links (NE24)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE24 and NE21

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE24 and NE23

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

6.6.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


According to the spectrum allocation on the radio network and the required radio transmission
capacity, you can obtain the basic information about the radio links, as provided in Table
6-41.
Table 6-41 Basic information about radio links

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Link ID

201

202

203

204

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Tx high site

NE21

NE23

NE23

NE21

Tx low site

NE22

NE22

NE24

NE24

Tx frequency at
the Tx high site
(MHz)

14930

14958

14930

14958

Tx frequency at
the Tx low site
(MHz)

14510

14538

14510

14538

T/R spacing
(MHz)

420

420

420

420

Channel
spacing (MHz)

14

14

14

14

RF
configuration
mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

1+0

Polarization
direction

V (vertical
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

H (horizontal
polarization)

V (vertical
polarization)

NOTE

The planning information that is not related to the configuration of the IDU (except for the polarization
direction) is not provided in this example.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information


According to the capacity of E1 and Ethernet services and the availability requirement, you can
calculate the Hybrid/AM attribute information as provided in Table 6-42.
Table 6-42 Hybrid/AM attribute information

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Number of E1s
in guaranteed
capacity mode

Number of E1s
in AM full
capacity mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Capacity of
high-priority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

28

28

28

28

Capacity of lowpriority
Ethernet
services (Mbit/
s)

40

40

40

40

AM enabling

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

AM guarantee
capacity mode

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

16QAM

AM full
capacity mode

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

128QAM

E1 priority
enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

NOTE

l In this example, E1 services are high-priority services and therefore the E1 service priority function
does not need to be enabled.
l According to the Hybrid ring protection scheme, each Hybrid radio link must carry all the services on
the ring.
l The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function require the appropriate license file.

Power and ATPC Information


By using the radio network planning software such as the Pathloss, you can analyze and compute
the parameters of radio links and obtain the power and ATPC information of the radio links, as
provided in Table 6-43.
Table 6-43 Power and ATPC information

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Transmit power
(dBm)

16.5 (NE21)

16.5 (NE23)

16 (NE23)

15 (NE21)

16.5 (NE22)

16.5 (NE22)

16 (NE24)

15 (NE24)

Receive power
(dBm)

-42 (NE21)

-44 (NE23)

-43 (NE23)

-45 (NE21)

-42 (NE22)

-44 (NE22)

-43 (NE24)

-45 (NE24)

ATPC enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

ATPC
automatic
threshold
enabling

Upper threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Lower threshold
of ATPC
adjustment
(dBm)

Maximum
transmit power
(dBm)

NOTE

l The transmit power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.


l The receive power is calculated in AM guaranteed capacity mode.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Information About IF Boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of the 1+1
protection, you can obtain the information about IF boards, as provided in Table 6-44.
Table 6-44 Information about IF boards

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Main IF board

4-ISU2 (NE21)

4-ISU2 (NE22)

4-ISU2 (NE23)

4-ISU2 (NE24)

3-ISU2 (NE22)

3-ISU2 (NE23)

3-ISU2 (NE24)

3-ISU2 (NE21)

Standby IF
board

RF
configuration
mode

1+0

1+0

1+0

1+0

Revertive mode

WTR time(s)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

Link 4

Reverse
switching
enabling

Alarm report
mode

Anti-jitter time

6.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the procedures for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and configure the IF/ODU
information of the radio link.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID

204

201

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

16QAM

16QAM

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

128QAM

128QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14958

14930

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

15

16.5

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-45

-42

TX Status

unmute

unmute

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID

201

202

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

16QAM

16QAM

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

128QAM

128QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

14538

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

16.5

16.5

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-42

-44

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID

202

203

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

16QAM

16QAM

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

128QAM

128QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Guarantee E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14958

14930

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

16.5

16

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-44

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID

204

203

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

16QAM

16QAM

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

128QAM

128QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14538

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

15

16

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-45

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

Step 2 See A.6.9.1 Setting IF Attributes and set the IF attributes


l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

Step 3 See A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and configure the ATPC function.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Parameter

ATPC Enable Status

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

ATPC Enable Status


Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

ATPC Enable Status

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

ATPC Enable Status

3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Disabled

Disabled

Step 4 See A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and create radio links
connections.
The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End

6.7 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Packet


Network)
This section considers radio links on a packet network as examples to describe how to configure
radio links according to the network plan.

6.7.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 5.7 Configuration Example (Packet Network), configure radio links according to
the network plan (as shown in Figure 6-10).
l

The AM function is enabled for each radio link.

All the radio links are configured with 1+0 non-protection.

The service capacity received by each BTS is provided in Table 6-45.


Table 6-45 Service capacity received by each BTS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

BTS

BTS32

BTS33

BTS34

Capacity of highpriority services


(Mbit/s)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

BTS

BTS32

BTS33

BTS34

Capacity of lowpriority services


(Mbit/s)

24

15

NOTE

High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority services cannot be
discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not require transmission
guarantees. Low-priority services can be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Table 6-46 lists common
high-priority services.

Table 6-46 Common service priorities

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Service Type

Service Class

TDM E1s that transmit 2G base station


services

High-priority services

ATM E1s (IMA E1s are not used) that


transmit 3G base station services

High-priority services

E1s (of a bandwidth not lower than the


high-priority service bandwidth) in the
IMA E1 group that transmits 3G base
station services

High-priority service

Other E1s in the IMA E1 group that


transmits 3G base station services

Low-priority services

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet


services

High-priority services

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low-priority services

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Figure 6-10 Networking diagram (Packet radio chain network)


301
14967M
14547M
14M
1+0
V-polarization

302
14930M
14510M
7M
1+0
H-polarzation
Tx low

Tx high

Tx high

Tx low

BTS33
NE34
BTS34

NE32

NE33
BTS32

Link ID
Tx high station Tx Freq.
Tx low station Tx Freq.
Channel spacing
RF configuarion
Polarization

The connections of radio links shown in Figure 6-10 are described as follows.
Table 6-47 Connections of radio links (NE32)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE32 and NE33

3-ISU2

Receives and transmits


Packet radio services.

Table 6-48 Connections of radio links (NE33)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE33 and NE32

4-ISU2

Receives and transmits


Packet radio services.

Between NE33 and NE34

3-ISU2

Receives and transmits


Packet radio services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-49 Connections of radio links (NE34)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE34 and NE33

3-ISU2

Receives and transmits


Packet radio services.

6.7.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring NE data.

Basic Information About Radio Links


Based on the spectrum allocation on radio networks and the required radio transmission capacity,
you can obtain the basic information about radio links as shown in Table 6-50.
Table 6-50 Basic information about radio links
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Link ID

301

302

Tx high site

NE33

NE33

Tx low site

NE32

NE34

Tx frequency at the Tx high


site (MHz)

14967

14930

Tx frequency at the Tx low


site (MHz)

14547

14510

T/R spacing (MHz)

420

420

Channel spacing (MHz)

14

RF configuration mode

1+0

1+0

Polarization direction

V (vertical polarization)

H (horizontal polarization)

NOTE

The link plan (except the polarization direction) that is irrelevant to IDU configuration is not provided in
this example.

Hybrid/AM Attribute Information


According to the capacity of E1 services and Ethernet services and the availability requirement,
you can obtain the Hybrid/AM attribute information, as provided in Table 6-51.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Table 6-51 Hybrid/AM attribute information


Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Capacity of high-priority
services (Mbit/s)

10

Capacity of low-priority
services (Mbit/s)

43

19

AM enabling

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation scheme of the


assured AM capacity

QPSK

QPSK

Modulation scheme of the


full AM capacity

64QAM

32QAM

NOTE

The Hybrid radio capacity and the AM function are available only if the corresponding license files are
configured.

Power and ATPC Information


By using radio network planning software such as Pathloss, you can analyze and compute various
parameters of the radio links. The power and automatic transmit power control (ATPC)
information about the radio links is provided in Table 6-52.
Table 6-52 Power and ATPC information
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Transmit power (dBm)

16 (NE32)

20 (NE33)

16 (NE33)

20 (NE34)

-43 (NE32)

-48 (NE33)

-43 (NE33)

-48 (NE34)

ATPC enabling

Disabled

Disabled

Automatic ATPC threshold


setting

Upper threshold of ATPC


adjustment (dBm)

Lower threshold of ATPC


adjustment (dBm)

Maximum transmit power


(dBm)

Receive power (dBm)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

NOTE

l The transmit power is computed in AM guaranteed capacity scheme.


l The receive power is computed in AM guaranteed capacity scheme.
l In this example, the ATPC function is disabled.

Information About IF boards


According to the radio type, slot priorities of IF boards, and configuration rules of 1+1 protection,
you can obtain the information about IF boards as provided in Table 6-53.
Table 6-53 Information about IF boards
Parameter

Link 1

Link 2

Main IF board

3-ISU2 (NE32)

3-ISU2 (NE33)

4-ISU2 (NE33)

3-ISU2 (NE34)

Standby IF board

RF configuration mode

1+0

1+0

Revertive mode

WTR time

Reverse switching enabling

Alarm reporting mode

Alarm reporting by
protection group
Jitter buffer time

300s (default value)

6.7.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration.

Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in A.3.4 Configuring the IF/ODU Information of a Radio Link and
configure IF/ODU information for radio links.
l The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

301
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM


Capacity

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the Full AM


Capacity

64QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14547

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

16

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-43

TX Status

unmute

l The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

Link ID

302

301

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

7M

14M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the


Guarantee AM Capacity

QPSK

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the


Full AM Capacity

32QAM

64QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

6 Configuring Radio Links

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

4-ISU2 and 24-ODU

TX Frequency(MHz)

14930

14967

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

420

TX Power(dBm)

20

16

Power to Be Received
(dBm)

-48

-43

TX Status

unmute

unmute

l The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2 and 23-ODU

Link ID

302

IF Service Type

Hybrid(Native E1+ETH)

IF Channel Bandwidth

7M

AM Enable Status

Enabled

Modulation Mode of the Guarantee AM


Capacity

QPSK

Modulation Mode of the Full AM


Capacity

32QAM

Enable E1 Priority

Disabled

Guarantee E1 Capacity

Full E1 Capacity

TX Frequency(MHz)

14510

T/R Spacing(MHz)

420

TX Power(dBm)

20

Power to Be Received(dBm)

-48

TX Status

unmute

Step 2 Follow instructions in A.6.9.1 Setting IF Attributes and configure IF attributes.


l The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

Parameter

Value
3-ISU2

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot

Enabled

l The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot

Value
3-ISU2

4-ISU2

Enabled

Enabled

l The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2

Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot

Enabled

Step 3 Follow instructions in A.6.9.2 Configuring ATPC Attributes and set the ATPC function.
l The values for the related parameters of NE32 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

l The values for the related parameters of NE33 are provided as follows.
Parameter

ATPC Enable Status

Value
3-ISU2

4-ISU2

Disabled

Disabled

l The values for the related parameters of NE34 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2

ATPC Enable Status

Disabled

Step 4 Follow instructions in A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using the Search Method and
create radio links.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

6 Configuring Radio Links

The main topology should display all the created radio links.
----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Configuring TDM Services

About This Chapter


The key to configuring TDM services is configuring the corresponding service crossconnections.
7.1 Basic Concepts
Before configuring the TDM service, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.
7.2 Configuration Procedure on a Per-NE Basis
This section describes the procedure for configuring the cross-connections and protection of a
TDM service and the procedure for setting the SDH/PDH port parameters.
7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain Network)
This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.
7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring Network)
This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.
7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain Network)
This section considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.
7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring Network)
This section considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

7.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the TDM service, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

7.1.1 Protection Modes for TDM Services


The OptiX RTN 910 supports linear MSP and SNCP for TDM services.

Linear MSP
Linear MSP applies to point-to-point physical networks. Linear MSP provides protection for the
services between two multiplex section termination (MST) modules. That is, when a linear MSP
switching occurs, the services are switched from the working section to the protection section.
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, linear MSP provides protection for TDM services that are
transmitted over SDH fibers.
Linear MSP is classified into 1+1 linear MSP and 1:N linear MSP.
l

1+1 linear MSP


To realize the 1+1 linear MSP, one working channel and one protection channel are
required. The protection channel does not transmit extra services. When the working
channel becomes unavailable, services are switched to the protection channel for
transmission. Figure 7-1 shows the application of 1+1 linear MSP. According to the
revertive mode, 1+1 linear MSP is classified into dual-ended revertive, dual-ended nonrevertive, single-ended revertive, and single-ended non-revertive modes. The single-ended
non-revertive mode is the most common linear MSP mode.
Figure 7-1 1+1 linear MSP
NE A

Working
channel

NE B

Protection
channel

Protection switching
NE A

Working
channel

NE B

Protection
channel

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

1:N linear MSP


To realize the 1:N linear MSP, N working channels and one protection channel are required.
The working channels transmit normal services and the protection channel transmits extra
services. When a working channel becomes unavailable, the services on this channel are
switched to the protection channel for transmission. As a result, the extra services
previously transmitted on this protection channel are interrupted. Figure 7-2 shows the
application of the 1:N linear MSP. The 1:N linear MSP is available only in dual-ended
revertive mode.
Figure 7-2 1:N linear MSP
NE A
Normal
service 1

...

Working
channel 1

NE B
Normal
service1

...

Working
channel N

Normal
service N

Normal
service N

Protection
channel

Extra
service

Extra
service

Protection switching
NE A
Normal
service 1

...
Normal
service N
Extra
service

Working
channel 1

NE B

Working
channel N
Protection
channel

Normal
service1

...
Normal
service N
Extra
service

SNCP
In the case of subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the protection subnetwork connection
takes over when the working subnetwork connection fails or deteriorates. In the case of the
OptiX RTN 910, SNCP provides protection for TDM services that are transmitted on STM-1
fiber ring networks, TDM radio ring networks, Hybrid radio ring networks, or hybrid ring
networks that comprise optical network equipment and Hybrid radio equipment.
The SNCP protection scheme, which requires one working subnetwork and one protection
subnetwork, selects one service from the dually transmitted services. In the case of SNCP, the
services are switched to the protection subnetwork for transmission when the working
subnetwork connection fails or deteriorates. Figure 7-3 shows the application of SNCP.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-3 SNCP


Working SNC
Trail source

Trail sink

NE A

NE B
Protection SNC

Protection switching

Working SNC
Trail source

Trail sink

NE A

NE B
Protection SNC

The OptiX RTN 910 supports the coexistence of SNCP and the 1+1 protection or N+1 protection.
In the case of coexistence of the SNCP and the 1+1 protection or N+1 protection, you can set
the hold-off time for SNCP so that the protection switching for the radio link can be performed
first, thus preventing circular switchings.

7.1.2 Timeslots for TDM Services on IF Boards


When TDM services need to be transmitted on a radio link, you need to configure the
corresponding cross-connections between the service timeslots on the service board and the
service timeslots on the IF board. The timeslots for the TDM services on the IF board are closely
related to the type of the radio services transmitted by the IF board and the radio capacity.

TDM Radio
When the IF board works in PDH radio mode and when the radio capacity is nxE1, the first to
nth VC-12 timeslots on the IF board are available and correspond to first to nth E1s that are
transmitted over microwave. For example, if the radio capacity is 4xE1, only the first to fourth
VC-12 timeslots in VC4-1 on the IF board are available. If a cross-connection is configured
between the E1 port of a service board and the second VC-12 in VC4-1 on the IF board, the E1
services that are accessed from the E1 port are sent to the second E1 timeslot that is transmitted
over radio.
When the IF board works in STM-1 radio mode, all the timeslots in VC4-1 on the IF board are
available and correspond to the timeslots in the VC-4 that is transmitted on microwave.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Hybrid Radio
When the IF board works in Hybrid radio mode and when the Guarantee E1 Capacity is set to
n in Hybrid/AM Configuration, the first to nth VC-12 timeslots on the IF board are available
and correspond to the first to nth E1 timeslots that are transmitted over microwave. For example,
if the E1 capacity is 75xE1, only the first to sixty-third VC-12 timeslots in VC4-1 and the first
to twelfth VC-12 timeslots in VC4-2 on the IF board are available. If a cross-connection is
configured between the E1 port of a service board and the second VC-12 in VC4-2 on the IF
board, the E1 services that are accessed from the E1 port are sent to the sixty-fifth E1 timeslot
that is transmitted over microwave.

7.1.3 Numbering Schemes for SDH Timeslots


Two numbering schemes for VC-12 timeslots are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or
SDH radio links.

VC-12 Timeslot Numbering


Two numbering schemes are applicable to SDH optical/electrical lines or SDH radio links when
you create cross-connections.
l

By order
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as timeslot scheme. The numbering
formula is as follows: VC-12 number = TUG-3 number + (TUG-2 number - 1) x 3 + (TU-12
number -1) x 21.
This scheme is the numbering scheme recommended by ITU-T G.707 and is the default
scheme adopted by the OptiX equipment.

Interleaved scheme
This timeslot numbering scheme is also considered as line scheme. The numbering formula
is as follows: VC-12 number = (TUG-3 number - 1) x 21 + (TUG-2 number -1) x 3 + TU-12
number.
The OptiX equipment can adopt this scheme when it interconnects with the equipment that
adopts the interleaved scheme or when a specific timeslot numbering scheme is required.

Figure 7-4 Numbering VC-12 timeslots by order


TUG-2

TUG-3

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

{
{
{

10

13

16

19

22

25

28

31

34

37

40

43

46

49

52

55

58

61

11

14

17

20

23

26

29

32

35

38

41

44

47

50

53

56

59

62

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

45

48

51

54

57

60

63

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

TU-12

125

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-5 Numbering VC-12 timeslots in the interleaved scheme

TUG-3

{
{
{

TUG-2
4

10

13

16

19

11

14

17

20

12

15

18

21

22

25

28

31

34

37

40

23

26

29

32

35

38

41

24

27

30

33

36

39

42

43

46

49

52

55

58

61

44

47

50

53

56

59

62

45

48

51

54

57

60

63

TU-12

VC-3 Timeslot Numbering


A VC-3 timeslot number corresponds to a TUG-3 number. If you need to configure crossconnections of VC-3s and VC-12s in the same VC-4, note that the timeslots in the TUG-3 that
are occupied by the VC-3 cross-connections cannot be configured for VC-12 cross-connections.

7.1.4 TDM Timeslot Planning Schemes


The timeslot allocation diagram illustrates the TDM timeslot planning scheme.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


The timeslot allocation diagram provides significant references for configuring TDM services.
Before planning TDM timeslots, you need to be familiar with the meanings shown in the timeslot
allocation diagram.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-6 Timeslot allocation diagram


Site
Timeslot

NE1
Interface
board 1

NE2
Interface Interface
board 2
board 3

NE3
Interface
board 5

NE4
Interface
board 6

Interface
board 4

Timeslot 1

VC4-1

Tributary board:
port No.
Tributary board:
port No.

Timeslot 2

Timeslot 4

Timeslot 3

Tributary board:
port No.

Tributary board: Tributary board: Tributary board:


port No.
port No.
port No.

VC4-2

......

Tributary board:
port No.
Timeslot 5
Tributary board:
port No.

......

Site area
Timeslot area
Timeslot allocation
area

Add/Drop
Foward
Pass-through
Add/Drop (SNCP path)

As shown in Figure 7-6, the timeslot allocation diagram contains three areas, namely, site area,
timeslot area, and timeslot allocation area.
The site area contains the NE icons and interface boards that carry radio links.
l

The start and end NEs each have only one interface board, which is located under the NE
icon. The intermediate NEs each have two interface boards, which are located at the two
sides of the vertical line under the NE icon. The interface boards may be IF boards or line
boards.

The interface board on the left side of the vertical line under an NE icon is connected to
the interface board on the right side of the vertical line under its upstream NE icon. The
interface board on the right side of the vertical line under an NE icon is connected to the
interface board on the left side of the vertical line under its downstream NE icon.

In the case of a ring radio link, before planning the site area, you need to divide the ring
radio link into a chain radio link and ensure that the start and end NEs are the same one.

The timeslot area represents the VC-4 timeslot resources. For example, in the case of radio links,
timeslots occupied by an STM-1 service are all in the first VC-4.
In the timeslot allocation area, each straight line represents a service and the numeric above the
straight line represents the timeslot occupied by this service.
l

A black dot indicates that services are added to or dropped from the NE. The board under
a black dot indicates the board and corresponding ports on the board that are used for adding
or dropping services.

An arrow indicates that services are transferred on the NE.

If a straight line passes a vertical line without any arrow or black dot, it indicates that
services pass through the NE.

In the case of protection configuration (for example, 1+1 HSB protection) wherein the
working service and protection service have the uniform route, you only need to draw a

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

continuous line to represent the working service. In the case of protection configuration
(for example, SNCP) wherein the working service and protection service have different
routes, you need to draw a continuous line to represent the working service and a dotted
line to represent the protection service.

TDM Timeslot Planning Scheme for Chain Networks


On the backhaul network for a mobile BTS, the services are accessed from different nodes and
then aggregated to the same node for transmission. In this case, allocate the timeslots on the
chain radio network as follows:
1.

Select the chain that contains the maximum of hops as the main chain. Then, divide the
chain network into several sub-chains by considering the main chain as the reference.
Consider the E1 channels or fiber connections that are used for transferring services
between NEs as links.

2.

Allocate the timeslots for the add/drop or pass-through services on the NEs of the main
chain one after another, in the descending order of the NE distance.

3.

Repeat the previous step to configure the timeslots for the services on all the sub-chains.

This timeslot allocation method ensures that only the numbers of the timeslots that the services
on the nodes of the aggregation sub-chain occupy may change.
The principles for obtaining the timeslot cross-connection configurations from the non-SNCP
service timeslot allocation diagram are as follows:
l

The vertical line under the NE name is considered as the reference.

If a straight line representing a pass-through service crosses the vertical line, it indicates
that cross-connections are configured between the boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are marked over the straight line.

If there is a straight line with one dot on one side of the vertical line, it indicates that crossconnections are configured between the board on this side of the vertical line and the board
under the straight line with one dot. The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are
marked over the straight line with one dot.

If there is a straight line with an arrow on both sides of the vertical line, it indicates that
cross-connections are configured between the two boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots on each board are marked over the straight
line with an arrow on the side of this board.

For details, see 7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Chain
Network) and 7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Chain
Network).

TDM Timeslot Planning Scheme for Ring Networks


On a backhaul network for a mobile BTS, the services are accessed from different nodes and
then aggregated to the same node for transmission. Hence, you can perform the following
operations to allocate the timeslots on the SNCP radio ring network:
1.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Allocate the timeslots to add/drop services on the NEs in anti-clockwise order. Allocate
the minimum VC-12 timeslot number to the service on the nearest NE. The number of the
timeslot each service occupies does not change on the ring network.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

2.

7 Configuring TDM Services

Repeat the previous step to configure the timeslots for the services on all the sub-chains.

This timeslot allocation method ensures that only the timeslots that the services on the nodes of
the aggregation sub-chain occupy change.
The principles for obtaining the timeslot cross-connection configurations from the SNCP service
timeslot allocation diagram are as follows:
l

The vertical line under the NE name is considered as the reference.

If a straight line representing a pass-through service crosses the vertical line, it indicates
that cross-connections are configured between the boards on both sides of the vertical line.
The corresponding cross-connected timeslots are marked over the straight line.

If there is a straight line with one dot on one side of the vertical line, it indicates that SNCP
cross-connections are configured between the board on this side of the vertical line and the
board under the straight line with one dot. The corresponding cross-connected timeslots
are marked over the straight line with one dot.

For details, see 7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio Ring
Network) and 7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid Radio Ring
Network).

7.2 Configuration Procedure on a Per-NE Basis


This section describes the procedure for configuring the cross-connections and protection of a
TDM service and the procedure for setting the SDH/PDH port parameters.
Figure 7-7 provides the procedure for configuring TDM services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-7 Configuration flow chart (TDM services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring MSP

Creating TDM service crossconnections

Configuring the automatic switching


conditions of SNCP services

Modifying the priorities of E1 services

Configuring the overhead bytes

Setting parameters
of SDH port

Setting parameters of PDH ports

Performing PRBS tests for E1


services

End

The procedure in the configuration flow chart is described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-1 Procedure for configuring TDM services


Step

Operation

Description

A.4.1 Configuring
Linear MSP

Required when linear MSP is configured for the


optical transmission line.
The parameters need to be set according to the
service planning.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Configuri
ng the
crossconnectio
ns of the
TDM
servicea

A.6.2
Setting
Working
Modes of
E1 Ports

Required when E1 ports on the MP1 board are used


as PDH ports for transmitting TDM services.

A.5.1
Creating
the CrossConnectio
ns of
Point-toPoint
Services

Required when the TDM service is a point-to-point


service.

A.5.2
Creating
CrossConnectio
ns of
SNCP
Services

Required when the TDM service is an SNCP service.

A.5.5 Configuring the


Automatic Switching
of SNCP Services

The parameters need to be set according to the


service planning.

The parameters need to be set according to the


service planning.

Optional when the TDM service is an SNCP service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Step

Operation

Description

A.5.3 Modifying the


Priorities of E1
Services

Required when the working source, protection


source, or sink of an SNCP service is a link where
the AM function and the E1 priority function are
enabled or when the E1 priority of a crossconnection needs to be changed.
E1 Priority needs to be modified according to the
service planning information.
NOTE
When the radio link on which the AM function is enabled
is configured with the E1 priority, note the following:
l If the cross-connection is configured for a point-topoint service, the E1 priority is configured when the
cross-connection is created.
l If the cross-connection is configured for an SNCP
service, the E1 priority is modified after the crossconnection is created.
l If the service priority is not configured when the crossconnection is created (that is, E1 Priority is set to
None), E1 Priority of each service must be set to a
specific value after the cross-connection is configured.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Configuri
ng the
overhead
bytes

A.6.4.1
Configuri
ng
RSOHs

Required when the J0_MM alarm is generated on the


local or remote equipment.

A.6.4.2
Configuri
ng VC-4
POHs

Required when the TIM or SLM alarm is generated


on the local or remote equipment.

A.6.4.3
Configuri
ng VC-12
POHs

Required when the TIM or SLM alarm is generated


on the local or remote equipment.

A.6.1 Setting the


Parameters of SDH
Ports

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Step

Operation

Description

A.6.3 Setting the


Parameters of PDH
Ports

Optional.
l To detect E1 BER performance on the OptiX
RTN 910, set E1 Frame Format of the local E1
port to the same value as that of the opposite E1
port. It is recommended that E1 Frame
Format of both the local and opposite E1 ports
be CRC-4 Multiframe.
l In other scenarios wherein the OptiX RTN 910
is used, it is recommended that E1 Frame
Format take its default value Unframe. If E1
Frame Format is Unframe, the OptiX RTN
910 transparently transmits E1 frames and the
local E1 port allows for interconnection with
another E1 port whose E1 Frame Format is
Double Frame or CRC-4 Multiframe.
NOTE
E1 Frame Format needs to be set to the same value at
both ends of an E1 link.
E1 ports integrated on the system control, switching, and
timing board do not support this parameter.

A.14.1 Testing E1
Services Using PRBS

The test results should show that each E1 service


contains no bit errors.

NOTE

a: In the case of 1+1 protection configuration or 1+1 linear MSP, you need to configure the TDM service on the
working channel only. In the case of N+1 protection configuration or 1:N linear MSP configuration, you need
to configure TDM services on the working channels and the extra service (if any) on the protection channel.

7.3 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio


Chain Network)
This section considers a TDM radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 6.3 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Chain Network),
configure the TDM services according to the following network planning information (as shown
in Figure 7-8):
l

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

To ensure reliable transmission of the services between NE11 and the third-party network,
linear MSP is configured for the optical transmission line.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Services are transferred between NE12 and NE13 through STM-1 optical ports.

Figure 7-8 Networking diagram (TDM services on a TDM radio chain network)
8xE1
BTS12
STM-1

STM-1

8xE1

NE14

BTS13

Third party
network

16xE1
NE13

NE12

14xE1

8xE1

NE11
BTS11

NE15

NE16
BTS15

BTS14

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-8 are described as follows.
Table 7-2 Connections of TDM links (NE11)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE11 and the thirdparty network

8-SL1D-1 (working port)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


linear MSP group.

Between NE11 and NE12

3-IF1 (main IF board)

8-SL1D-2 (protection port)

4-IF1 (standby IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

Table 7-3 Connections of TDM links (NE12)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE12 and BTS11

9-SP3S (1-16)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS11.

Between NE12 and NE11

3-IF1 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-IF1 (standby IF board)


Between NE12 and NE13

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

8-SL1D-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Configure this port to


transmit TDM services.

134

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-4 Connections of TDM links (NE13)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE13 and NE12

8-SL1D-1

Configure this port to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE13 and NE14

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE13 and NE15

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 7-5 Connections of TDM links (NE14)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE14 and BTS12

9-SP3S (1-16)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS12 and
BTS13.

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE14 and BTS13


Between NE14 and NE13

Table 7-6 Connections of TDM links (NE15)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE15 and BTS14

9-SP3S (1-14)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS14.

Between NE15 and NE13

4-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE15 and NE16

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 7-7 Connections of TDM links (NE16)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE16 and BTS15

9-SP3S (1-8)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS15.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Link

Port

Description

Between NE16 and NE15

3-IF1

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

7.3.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-9 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the service
planning information.
Figure 7-9 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the TDM radio chain network)
Links-1: NE11 - NE12 - NE13 -NE15 -NE16
Station
Timeslot

BSC

NE11

NE12

8-SL1D-1 3-IF1
VC12: 1-8

3-IF1

8-SL1D-1

NE13
8-SL1D-1 4-IF1

NE15
4-IF1 3-IF1

3-IF1
9-SP3S:1-8

VC12: 9-22
VC4-1

NE16

9-SP3S:1-14

VC12: 23-38
VC12: 39-54
9-SP3S:1-16

Links-2: NE13-NE14
Station
Timeslot
VC4-1

NE13

NE14

8-SL1D-1 3-IF1
VC12: 23-38

3-IF1
VC12: 1-16
9-SP3S:1-16

Pass through
Add/Drop
Foward

As shown in Figure 7-9, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l

E1 services on NE16:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE16.
The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the first
optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE11 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of NE16.

E1 services on NE15:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE15.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

The E1 services occupy the ninth to twenty-second VC-12 timeslots on the link between
the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE11 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of
NE15.
l

E1 services on NE14:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE14.
The E1 services occupy the twenty-third to thirty-eighth VC-12 timeslots on the link
between the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE11 and the SL1D board
in slot 8 of NE13.
The E1 services occupy the first to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the
IF1 board in slot 3 of NE13 and the IF1 board in slot 3 of NE14.

E1 services on NE12:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to sixteenth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE12.
The E1 services occupy the thirty-ninth to fifty-fourth VC-12 timeslots on the link
between the first optical port on the SL1D board in slot 8 of NE11 and the IF1 board in
slot 3 of NE12.

Linear MSP
In this configuration example, no extra services need to be transmitted. Hence, the single-ended
non-revertive 1+1 linear MSP is configured to protect the optical transmission line between
NE11 and the third-party network. Table 7-8 provides the related planning information.
Table 7-8 Linear MSP
Parameter

NE11

Protection Type

1+1 Linear MSP

Switching Mode

Single-Ended Switching

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

SD Enable

Enabled (default value)

Protocol Type

New Protocol (default value)

West Working Unit

8-SL1D-1

West Protection Unit

8-SL1D-2

NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, SD Enable, Protocol Type take the default values.

7.3.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Procedure
Step 1 See A.4.1 Configuring Linear MSP and configure 1+1 linear MSP.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE11

Protection Type

1+1 Linear MSP

Switching Mode

Single-Ended Switching

Revertive Mode

Non-Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

SD Enable

Enabled

Protocol Type

New Protocol

Mapped Board

l West Working Unit: 8-SL1D-1


l West Protection Unit: 8-SL1D-2

Step 2 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and create the pointto-point service cross-connections.
l The values for the related parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE11

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

8-SL1D-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-54

Sink Slot

3-IF1-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-54

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE12

Level

VC-12

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-IF1-1

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-38

39-54

Sink Slot

8-SL1D-1

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-38

1-16

Activate Immediately

Yes

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE13

Level

VC-12

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

8-SL1D-1

8-SL1D-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-22

23-38

Sink Slot

4-IF1-1

3-IF1-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-22

1-16

Activate Immediately

Yes

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter

Value
NE14

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-16

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-16

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE15

Level

VC-12

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

4-IF1-1

4-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8

9-22

Sink Slot

3-IF1-1

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-8

1-14

Activate Immediately

Yes

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE16

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE16

Source Slot

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8

Activate Immediately

Yes

Step 3 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.
----End

7.4 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a TDM Radio


Ring Network)
This section considers a TDM radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 6.4 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the TDM Radio Ring Network),
configure the TDM services according to the service requirements. To ensure reliable
transmission of the services between the BTSs and the third-party network, SNCP is configured
to provide protection for TDM services on the ring network. See Figure 7-10.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-10 Networking diagram (TDM services on a TDM radio ring network)
Third party
SDH network

16E1

NE21

4E1
BTS21

4E1
4E1 NE22

NE24

BTS24

BTS22
4E1
NE23
BTS23

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-10 are described as follows.
Table 7-9 Connections of TDM links (NE21)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE21 and the thirdparty network

9-SP3S (1-16)

Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE21 and NE22

4-IF1

Configure this port as an east


port.

Between NE21 and NE24

3-IF1

Configure this port as a west


port.

Table 7-10 Connections of TDM links (NE22)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE22 and BTS21

9-SP3S (1-8)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS21 and
BTS22.

Between NE22 and BTS22

Configure this port to be the


SNCP service sink.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Between NE22 and NE21

3-IF1

Configure this port as a west


port.

Between NE22 and NE23

4-IF1

Configure this port as an east


port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-11 Connections of TDM links (NE23)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE23 and BTS23

9-SP3S (1-4)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS23.

Between NE23 and NE22

3-IF1

Configure this port as a west


port.

Between NE23 and NE24

4-IF1

Configure this port as an east


port.

Table 7-12 Connections of TDM links (NE24)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE24 and BTS24

9-SP3S (1-4)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS24.

Between NE24 and NE21

4-IF1

Configure this port as an east


port.

Between NE24 and NE23

3-IF1

Configure this port as a west


port.

7.4.2 Service Planning


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring the NE data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-11 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the service
planning information.
Figure 7-11 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM service on the TDM radio ring network)
Station
Timeslot

NE21

NE22

NE23

4-IF1

3-IF1 4-IF1

3-IF1 4-IF1

VC12: 1-8

9-SP3S:9-12

NE21
3-IF1

VC12: 1-8

9-SP3S:1-8
9-SP3S:1-8 9-SP3S:1-8
VC12: 9-12
VC4-1

NE24
3-IF1 4-IF1

9-SP3S:1-8
VC12: 9-12
9-SP3S:9-12
VC12: 13-16

9-SP3S:1-4 9-SP3S:1-4
VC12: 13-16

9-SP3S:13-16

9-SP3S:1-4

9-SP3S:1-4

9-SP3S:13-16

Pass through (SNCP working path)


Pass through (SNCP protection path)
Add/Drop (SNCP working path)
Add/Drop (SNCP protection path)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

As shown in Figure 7-11, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l

E1 services on NE22:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE22.
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to eighth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE21.
The E1 services occupy the first to eighth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.

E1 services on NE23:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE23.
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the ninth to twelfth ports on the SP3S
board in slot 9 of NE21.
The E1 services occupy the ninth to twelfth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.

E1 services on NE24:
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to fourth ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE24.
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the thirteenth to sixteenth ports on the
SP3S board in slot 9 of NE21.
The E1 services occupy the thirteenth to sixteenth VC-12 timeslots on the ring.

SNCP
Table 7-13 provides the information about SNCP.
Table 7-13 SNCP
Parameter

Value

Working Source

See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Protection Source

See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time

600s (default value)

Hold-Off Time

0 (default value)

Switching Condition

Necessary conditions for an SNCP switching (default


values)

NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, WTR Time, Hold-Off Time, and Switching Condition take the default values.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

7.4.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services and configure the SNCP service
cross-connections.
l The values for the related parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE21

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Level

VC-12

VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms)

Revertive Mode

Revertive

Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

600

Source Slot

4-IF1-1 (working service)

3-IF1-1 (working service)

3-IF1-1 (protection service)

4-IF1-1 (protection service)

VC4-1 (working service)

VC4-1 (working service)

VC4-1 (protection service)

VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-12

13-16

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-12

13-16

Source VC4

l The values for the related parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE22

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Direction

Bidirectional

Level

VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms)

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE22

Source Slot

3-IF1-1 (working service)


4-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4

VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8

l The values for the related parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE23

Direction

Bidirectional

Level

VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms)

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

Source Slot

3-IF1-1 (working service)


4-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4

VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

9-12

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-4

l The values for the related parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE24

Direction
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Bidirectional
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE24

Level

VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms)

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

Source Slot

4-IF1-1 (working service)


3-IF1-1 (protection service)

Source VC4

VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

13-16

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-4

Step 2 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and configure the
service cross-connections on NE22, NE23, and NE24.
l The values for the related parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE22

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

9-16

Sink Slot

4-IF1-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

9-16

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE23

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8,13-16

Sink Slot

4-IF1-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-8,13-16

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the related parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE24

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-IF1-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-12

Sink Slot

4-IF1-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-12

Activate Immediately

Yes

Step 3 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test two E1 services on each BTS. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no
bit errors.
----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

7.5 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid


Radio Chain Network)
This section considers a Hybrid radio chain network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network),
configure the TDM services according to the following network planning information (as shown
in Figure 7-12):
l

Services are transferred between NE12 and NE13 through E1 channels.

The service capacity accessed by each BTS is provided in Table 7-14.


Table 7-14 Service capacity accessed by each BTS
BTS

BTS13

BTS14

Number of high-priority E1
services

Number of low-priority E1
services

Figure 7-12 Networking diagram (TDM services on a Hybrid radio chain network)

1xE1

Packet
network

E1
NE14

BTS13
NE13

NE12

NE11

4xE1
NE16

NE15
BTS14

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-12 are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-15 Connections of TDM links (NE11)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE11 and the PSN

9-MP1(1-5)

Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE11 and NE12

3-ISU2 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-ISU2 (standby IF board)

Table 7-16 Connections of TDM links (NE12)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE12 and NE11

3-ISU2 (main IF board)

Configure the ports as a 1+1


HSB protection group.

4-ISU2 (standby IF board)


Between NE12 and NE13

9-SP3S (1-5)

Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Table 7-17 Connections of TDM links (NE13)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE13 and NE12

9-SP3S (1-5)

Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE13 and NE14

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Between NE13 and NE15

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Table 7-18 Connections of TDM links (NE14)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE14 and BTS13

9-SP3S (1)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS13.

Between NE14 and NE13

3-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-19 Connections of TDM links (NE15)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE15 and BTS14

9-SP3S (1-4)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS14.

Between NE15 and NE13

4-ISU2

Configure this port to receive


and transmit radio service
signals.

7.5.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-13 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the network
planning information.
Figure 7-13 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the Hybrid chain radio network)
Links-1: NE11 - NE12 - NE13 -NE15
Station
Timeslot

NE11
9-MP1 3-ISU2

RNC

NE12
3-ISU2 9-SP3S

NE13
9-SP3S 4-ISU2

NE15
4-ISU2

VC12: 1-2
9-SP3S:1-2

VC12: 3-4
VC4-1

9-SP3S:3-4

VC12: 5

Links-2: NE13-NE14
Station
Timeslot
VC4-1

/
/
/

NE13

NE14

9-SP3S 3-ISU2
VC12: 5

3-ISU2

VC12: 1
9-SP3S:1

Pass through(low/high)
Add/Drop(low/high)
Foward(low/high)

As shown in Figure 7-13, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

E1 services on NE15
The E1 services are added to or dropped from ports 1-4 of the SP3S board in slot 9 on
NE15.Ports 1 and 2 add and drop high-priority services and ports 3 and 4 add and drop
low-priority services.
The E1 services occupy the first to fourth VC-12 timeslots on the link between the
MP1 board in slot 9 of NE11 and the ISU2 board in slot 4 of NE15. Ports 1 and 2 transmit
high-priority services and ports 3 and 4 transmit low-priority services.

E1 services on NE14
The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first port on the SP3S board in slot
9 of NE14. The E1 services received by NE14 are high-priority services by default,
because the E1 service priority function is disabled on the radio link to which NE14
belongs.
The E1 services occupy the fifth VC-12 timeslot on the link between the MP1 board in
slot 9 of NE11 and the SP3S board in slot 9 of NE13.
The E1 services occupy the first VC-12 timeslot on the link between the ISU2 board in
slot 3 of NE13 and the ISU2 board in slot 3 of NE14.

7.5.3 Configuration Process (on a Per-NE Basis)


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.6.2 Setting Working Modes of E1 Ports and set working modes of E1 ports.
The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
9-MP1(1-5)

Service Mode

PDH

Step 2 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and create point-topoint service cross-connections.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE11 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE11

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Level

VC12

VC12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

9-MP1

9-MP1

Source VC4

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2,5

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Parameter

Value
NE11

Sink Slot

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-2,5

3-4

E1 Priority

High

Low

Activate Immediately

Yes

Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE12

Level

VC12

VC12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2,5

3-4

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-2,5

3-4

E1 Priority

High

Low

Activate Immediately

Yes

Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE13

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Level

VC12

VC12

VC12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

9-SP3S

9-SP3S

9-SP3S

Source VC4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE13

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

3-4

Sink Slot

4-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

3-4

E1 Priority

High

Low

Activate
Immediately

Yes

Yes

Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE14

Level

VC12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-ISU2-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

E1 Priority

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE15

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Level

VC12

VC12

Direction

Bidirectional

Bidirectional

Source Slot

4-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE15

Source VC4

VC4-1

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range


(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

3-4

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.


1,3-6)

1-2

3-4

E1 Priority

High

Low

Activate Immediately

Yes

Yes

Step 3 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test one E1 service on BTS13 and BTS14. The test results should show that the E1 services
contain no bit errors.
----End

7.6 Configuration Example (TDM Services on a Hybrid


Radio Ring Network)
This section considers a Hybrid radio ring network as an example to describe how to configure
TDM services according to the network planning information.

7.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 6.6 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Ring Network),
configure the TDM services according to the service requirements. To ensure reliable
transmission of the services between the BTSs and the PSN, SNCP is configured to provide
protection for TDM services on the ring network. See Figure 7-14.The service capacity accessed
by each BTS is provided in Table 7-20.
Table 7-20 Service capacity accessed by each BTS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

BTS

BTS22

Number of E1s

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Figure 7-14 Networking diagram (TDM services on a Hybrid radio ring network)
Packet
network

2E1

NE21

BSC

BTS21
2E1 NE22

NE24

BTS24

BTS22

NE23
BTS23

The connections of TDM links shown in Figure 7-14 are described as follows.
Table 7-21 Connections of TDM links (NE21)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE21 and the PSN

9-MP1 (1-2)

Configure the ports to


transmit TDM services.

Between NE21 and NE22

4-ISU2

Configure this port as an east


port.

Between NE22 and NE24

3-ISU2

Configure this port as a west


port.

Table 7-22 Connections of TDM links (NE22)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Description

Between NE22 and BTS22

9-SP3S (1-2)

Configure the ports to access


services from BTS22.

Between NE22 and NE21

3-ISU2

Configure this port as a west


port.

Between NE22 and NE23

4-ISU2

Configure this port as an east


port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

Table 7-23 Connections of TDM links (NE23)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE23 and NE22

3-ISU2

Configure this port as a west


port.

Between NE23 and NE24

4-ISU2

Configure this port as an east


port.

Table 7-24 Connections of TDM links (NE24)


Link

Port

Description

Between NE24 and NE21

4-ISU2

Configure this port as an east


port.

Between NE24 and NE23

3-ISU2

Configure this port as a west


port.

7.6.2 Service Planning


This section provides the information about all the parameters required for configuring the NE
data.

Timeslot Allocation Diagram


Figure 7-15 shows the timeslots that are allocated for the TDM services according to the network
planning information.
Figure 7-15 Timeslot allocation diagram (TDM services on the Hybrid radio ring network)
Station
Timeslot

NE22

NE21
4-ISU2

3-ISU2 4-ISU2
VC12: 1-2

9-MP1:1-2

NE24

NE23
3-ISU2 4-ISU2

3-ISU2 4-ISU2

NE21
3-ISU2

VC12: 1-2

9-SP3S:1-2 9-SP3S:1-2

9-MP1:1-2

Pass through (SNCP working path)


Pass through (SNCP protection path)
Add/Drop (SNCP working path)
Add/Drop (SNCP protection path)

As shown in Figure 7-15, the information about the timeslots that the TDM services occupy on
each NE is as follows:
l

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to second ports on the SP3S board
in slot 9 of NE22.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

7 Configuring TDM Services

The E1 services are added to or dropped from the first to second ports on the MP1 board
in slot 9 of NE21.

The E1 services occupy the first to second VC-12 timeslots on the ring.

SNCP
Table 7-25 provides the information about SNCP.
Table 7-25 SNCP
Parameter

Value

Working Source

See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Protection Source

See the timeslot allocation diagram.

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time

600s (default value)

Hold-Off Time

0 (default value)

Switching Condition

Necessary conditions for an SNCP switching (default


values)

NOTE

Unless otherwise specified, WTR Time, Hold-Off Time, and Switching Condition take the default values.

7.6.3 Configuration Process


This section describes the process for the data configuration on a per-NE basis.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.6.2 Setting Working Modes of E1 Ports and set working modes of E1 ports.
The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
9-MP1(1-2)

Service Mode

PDH

Step 2 See A.5.2 Creating Cross-Connections of SNCP Services and configure the SNCP service
cross-connections.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE21 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE21

Direction

Bidirectional

Level

VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms)

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

Source Slot

4-ISU2-1 (working service)


3-ISU2-1 (protection service)

Source VC4

VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

Sink Slot

9-MP1

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

E1 Priority

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE22 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE22

Direction

Bidirectional

Level

VC-12

Hold-off Time(100ms)

Revertive Mode

Revertive

WTR Time(s)

600

Source Slot

3-ISU2-1 (working service)


4-ISU2-1 (protection service)

Source VC4

VC4-1 (working service)


VC4-1 (protection service)

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE22

Sink Slot

9-SP3S

Sink VC4

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

E1 Priority

Activate Immediately

Yes

Step 3 See A.5.1 Creating the Cross-Connections of Point-to-Point Services and configure the
service cross-connections on NE23 and NE24.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE23 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE23

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-ISU2-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

Sink Slot

4-ISU2-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

Priority

Activate Immediately

Yes

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE24 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE24

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Level

VC-12

Direction

Bidirectional

Source Slot

3-ISU2-1

Source VC4

VC4-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

7 Configuring TDM Services

Value
NE24

Source Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

Sink Slot

4-ISU2-1

Sink VC4

VC4-1

Sink Timeslot Range(e.g.1,3-6)

1-2

Priority

Activate Immediately

Yes

Step 4 See A.14.1 Testing E1 Services Using PRBS and test the E1 services.
Test one E1 service on BTS22. The test results should show that the E1 services contain no bit
error.
----End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the


Packet Plane

About This Chapter


Native Ethernet services on the packet plane include Native E-Line services and Native E-LAN
services.
8.1 Basic Concepts
Before configuring the Ethernet services, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.
8.2 Configuration Procedure
The service configuration procedure differs according to the specific service type.
8.3 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services)
This section considers a point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service as an example
to describe how to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.4 Configuration Example (VLAN-Based E-Line Service)
This section considers a VLAN-based E-line service as an example to describe how to configure
the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.5 Configuration Example (QinQ-Based E-Line Service)
This section considers a QinQ-based E-line service as an example to describe how to configure
the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.6 Configuration Example (802.1d-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section considers an 802.1d-bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.7 Configuration Example (802.1q-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section considers an 802.1q-bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.8 Configuration Example (802.1ad-Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section considers an 802.1ad-bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.
8.9 Configuration Example (Hybrid Configuration of E-Line Services and E-LAN Services)
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

This section describes how to configure a radio network that transmits E-Line services and ELAN services at the same time according to the network planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the Ethernet services, you need to be familiar with the basic concepts.

8.1.1 What's the Packet Plane


The packet plane refers to the switching plane provided by the packet switching unit on a system
control, switching, and timing board. The packet plane supports a wide range of services and
features based on Native Ethernet, as well as a wide range of services and features based on
MPLS/PWE3.
As shown in Figure 8-1, the ports connecting to the packet plane are classified into the following
types:
l

FE/GE ports on a system control, switching, and timing board


These ports are directly connected to the packet switching unit.

FE/GE ports on an Ethernet interface board


In the receive direction, the Ethernet switching unit on an Ethernet interface board adds
port tags to the packets received from its FE/GE ports. Then, the packets are converged to
the internal GE ports on the board, and then transmitted to the packet switching unit. The
packet switching unit processes the packets of each port based on the port tags. In the
transmit direction, the packet switching unit adds the port tags to the packets. Then, the
packets are transmitted to the Ethernet switching unit through the internal GE ports on the
board. The Ethernet switching unit transmits the packets to the ports based on the port tags.
Therefore, the FE/GE ports on the Ethernet interface board can be regarded as being directly
connected to the packet switching unit.

IF_ETH ports on a general IF board or general XPIC IF board


IF_ETH ports are internal GE ports on a general IF board or general XPIC IF board. Ethernet
packets are transmitted to the local IF board through its IF_ETH ports, and then mapped
into Integrated IP radio frames. Ethernet packets demapped from Integrated IP radio frames
are transmitted to the packet switching unit through IF_ETH ports.
The main differences between an IF_ETH port and an FE/GE port are as follows:
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port. It transmits and receives MAC frames and
does not have PHY-layer functions.
The bandwidth at an IF_ETH port is equal to the Ethernet service bandwidth that the
Integrated IP radio supports. Therefore, when the AM function is enabled in the case
of Integrated IP radio, the bandwidth at an IF_ETH port changes according to the
modulation scheme.
NOTE

Since an IF port corresponds to an IF_ETH port, the IF ports or the microwave ports corresponding to IF
ports can be regarded as being directly connected to the packet plane.

Bridging port (PORT 10) connecting to the packet plane on the EFP8 board
The EFP8 board has two bridging ports: PORT 9 and PORT 10.
PORT 9 and PORT 10 are two back-to-back internal GE ports, having no PHY-layer
function.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

PORT 10 is connected to the packet plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane
are transmitted to the EoPDH plane through PORT 10.
PORT 9 is connected to the EoPDH plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane
are transmitted to the FE port or VCTRUNK port on the EFP8 board through PORT 9.
l

Bridging port (PORT 8) connecting to the packet plane on the EMS6 board
The EMS6 board has two bridging ports: PORT 7 and PORT 8.
PORT 7 and PORT 8 are two back-to-back internal GE ports, having no PHY-layer
function.
PORT 8 is connected to the packet plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane are
transmitted to the EoS plane through PORT 8.
PORT 7 is connected to the EoS plane. The Ethernet services on the packet plane are
transmitted to the FE port, GE port, or VCTRUNK port on the EMS6 board through
PORT 7.

Figure 8-1 Packet plane


System control, switching,
and timing board

Packet plane
Ethernet interface board
FE/GE

PORT1

IF_ETH

Ethernet
switching
unit

FE/GE

PORTn

FE/GE

Ethernet interface board


PORT1

GE

PORTn

IF

IF unit

GE

FE/GE

General IF board or
general XPIC IF board

General IF board or
general XPIC IF board

Packet
switching unit

Ethernet
switching
unit

IF_ETH

IF

IF unit
GE

GE

FE/GE

PORT10

FE/GE

GE

PORT9

GE
PORT8

GE

PORT7

GE

EFP8
Ethernet
switching unit

EoPDH plane

EMS6
Ethernet
switching unit

EoS plane

8.1.2 Ethernet Port Numbers


On the NMS, Ethernet ports are represented by PORTs.
l

For the EM6F/EM6FA, PORT1 and PORT2 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively; PORT3
to PORT6 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.

For the EM6T/EM6TA, PORT1 and PORT2 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively; PORT3
to PORT6 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.

For the EM6X (logical board), PORT5 and PORT6 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively;
PORT1 to PORT4 represent FE1 to FE4 respectively.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

For the EM6TB (logical board), GE1 and GE2 represent PORT5 and PORT6 respectively;
FE1 to FE4 represent PORT1 to PORT4 respectively.

For the EM4T (logical board), PORT3 and PORT4 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively;
PORT1 and PORT2 represent FE1 and FE2 correspond to respectively.

For the EM4F (logical board), PORT3 and PORT4 represent GE1 and GE2 respectively;
PORT1 and PORT2 represent FE1 and FE2 respectively.

8.1.3 Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows the network equipment to send information about its
supported working mode to the opposite end of the network and to receive corresponding
information that the opposite end may transfer.

Auto-Negotiation Function of FE Electrical Ports


FE electrical ports may work in four common working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, and 100M full-duplex. If the working modes of the local FE electrical
port and the opposite FE electrical port do not match, the two ports cannot communicate with
each other. Auto-negotiation effectively resolves this problem. Auto-negotiation uses fast link
pulses and normal link pulses to transfer negotiation information about the working mode; lastly,
the working modes of the FE electrical ports match at both ends.
Table 8-1 lists auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports.
Table 8-1 Auto-negotiation rules for FE electrical ports (when the local FE electrical port works
in auto-negotiation mode)
Working Mode of the Opposite FE
Electrical Port

Auto-Negotiation Result

Auto-negotiation

100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex

100M half-duplex

NOTE

As provided in Table 8-1, when the opposite FE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex
mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the working modes of the FE
electrical ports at both ends. As a result, some packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite FE electrical port
works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the local FE electrical port to
10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

When the FE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate flow control.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Electrical Ports


GE electrical ports can work in five working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M
half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, and 1000M full-duplex. Auto-negotiation of GE electrical ports
is similar to FE electrical port auto-negotiation. Table 8-2 lists auto-negotiation rules for GE
electrical ports.

Table 8-2 Auto-negotiation rules for GE electrical ports (when the local GE electrical port works
in auto-negotiation mode)
Working Mode of the Opposite GE
Electrical Port

Auto-Negotiation Result

Auto-negotiation (GE electrical port)

1000M full-duplex

Auto-negotiation (FE electrical port)

100M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M half-duplex

10M full-duplex

10M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M half-duplex

100M full-duplex

100M half-duplex

1000M full-duplex

1000M full-duplex

NOTE

As provided in Table 8-2, when the opposite GE electrical port works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex
mode, auto-negotiation does not necessarily achieve full matching between the working modes of the GE
electrical ports at both ends. As a result, some packets are lost. Therefore, when the opposite GE electrical port
works in 10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex mode, set the working mode of the local GE electrical port to
10M full-duplex or 100M full-duplex.

When the GE electrical ports at both ends work in auto-negotiation mode, the equipment at both
ends can negotiate flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Function of GE Optical Ports


GE optical ports support only 1000M full-duplex working mode. Auto-negotiation of GE optical
ports is used only for negotiating flow control.

8.1.4 Flow Control Function


When the equipment fails to handle the traffic received at the port due to poor data processing/
transferring capability, the line becomes congested. This also causes buffer overflow and
therefore some packets will be discarded. To reduce the number of packets to be discarded, take
appropriate flow control measures.
Half-duplex Ethernet uses a back-pressure mechanism to control flow. Full-duplex Ethernet uses
PAUSE frames to control flow. Currently, half-duplex Ethernet is not widely applied; therefore,
flow control implemented on the equipment is used for full-duplex Ethernet.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

The flow control function on the equipment is classified into two types: auto-negotiation flow
control and non-auto-negotiation flow control.

Auto-Negotiation Flow Control


When an Ethernet port works in auto-negotiation mode, use auto-negotiation flow control. The
auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l

Asymmetric PAUSE toward the link partner


The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.

Symmetric PAUSE
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and process received PAUSE frames.

Both asymmetric and symmetric PAUSE


The port has the following capabilities:
Transmits and processes PAUSE frames.
Transmits PAUSE frames but cannot process received PAUSE frames.
Processes received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames.

Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE

On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 910 supports only two auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled mode and
Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric PAUSE) mode.

Non-Auto-Negotiation Flow Control


When an Ethernet port works in a fixed working mode, use non-auto-negotiation flow control.
The non-auto-negotiation flow control modes include the following:
l

Send only
The port can transmit PAUSE frames in case of congestion but cannot process received
PAUSE frames.

Receive only
The port can process received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames in case
of congestion.

Symmetric
The port can transmit PAUSE frames and can also process received PAUSE frames.

Disabled
The port does not transmit or process PAUSE frames.
NOTE

On the NMS, the OptiX RTN 910 supports only two non-auto-negotiation flow control modes: Disabled mode
and Enable Symmetric Flow Control (symmetric) mode.

8.1.5 Native Ethernet Service Types Based on the Packet Plane


Based on the packet plane, Native Ethernet services are classified into six types.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1.5.1 Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service


The point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service are the basic E-Line model. Pointto-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service isolation, or service
distinguishing; instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted between two service
access points.

Service Model
Table 8-3 describes the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model.
Table 8-3 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service model
Service Model

Traffic Flow

Service Direction

Encapsulation
Type

Description

Model 1

PORT (source)

UNI-UNI

Null (source)

The source port


transparently
transmits all the
received Ethernet
frames to the sink
port.

PORT (sink)

Model 2

PORT (source)

NOTE
In service model 2,
ports process the
received Ethernet
frames according to
their TAG attributes.
Therefore, service
model 2 is not a real
transparent
transmission model
and is not
recommended.

PORT (sink)

Null (sink)

UNI-UNI

802.1Q (source)
802.1Q (sink)

The source port


processes the
incoming Ethernet
frames based on its
TAG attribute, and
then sends the
processed Ethernet
frames to the sink
port. The sink port
processes the
Ethernet frames
based on its TAG
attribute, and then
exports the
processed Ethernet
frames.

Typical Application
Figure 8-2 shows the typical application of service model 1.
Figure 8-2 Typical application of service model 1
NE 1
Port 1
Service 1

Port 3

E-Line

Service 2
Port 2

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

E-Line

NE 2
Transmission
Network

Port 4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Port 3

E-Line

Port 1
Service 1

E-Line
Port 4

Service 2
Port 2

169

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

In service model 1, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN IDs or carry
unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and
port 2 transparently transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to port 3 and port 4,
respectively. Port 3 and port 4 then transmit Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2.
Service processing on NE2 is the same as on NE1.
In service model 2, Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2, which carry no VLAN IDs or carry
unknown VLAN IDs, are accessed to NE1 through port 1 and port 2 respectively. Port 1 and
Port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 1 and Port
2 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to Port 3 and Port 4 respectively. Port 3 and
Port 4 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes. Then, Port 3 and Port
4 send Ethernet service 1 and Ethernet service 2 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same
as on NE1.

8.1.5.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services


VLANs can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one physical
channel for transmission. These E-Line services are called VLAN-based E-Line services.

Service Model
Table 8-4 shows the VLAN-based E-Line service model.
Table 8-4 VLAN-based E-Line service model
Service Type

Service Flow

Service Direction

Port
Encapsulation
Mode

Service
Description

VLAN-based ELine service

PORT+VLAN
(source)

UNI-UNI

802.1Q (source)

The source port


processes the
incoming Ethernet
frames based on its
TAG attribute, and
then sends the
Ethernet frames
with a specific
VLAN ID to the sink
port. The sink port
processes the
Ethernet frames
based on its TAG
attribute, and then
exports the
processed Ethernet
frames.

802.1Q (sink)

PORT+VLAN
(sink)
NOTE
The VLAN ID of the
source must be the
same as that of the
sink.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Typical Application
Figure 8-3 shows the typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model. Service 1
and service 2 carry different VLAN IDs. After the two Ethernet services are received at NE1
through port 1 and port 2 respectively, they share the same transmission channel at port 3.
On NE1, port 1 and port 2 process the incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes;
then, port 1 and port 2 send service 1 and service 2 to port 3. Port 3 processes all the outgoing
packets based on its TAG attribute, and then sends service 1 and service 2 to NE2. Due to the
different VLAN IDs, service 1 and service 2 can be transmitted through port 3 at the same time.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-3 Typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model
NE 1
Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

Port 1

Port 2

E-Line
e
E-Lin

NE 2
Port 3

Transmission
Network

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

Port 3
Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

E-Line

E-Lin
e

Port 1

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Service 2
Port 2 VLAN ID: 200

8.1.5.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services


S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one
physical channel for transmission. These services are called QinQ-based E-Line services.
NOTE

11.1.1.3 PW-Carried E-Line Services describes QinQ-based E-Line services carried by PWs.

Service Model
Table 8-5 shows the QinQ-based E-Line service models.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-5 QinQ-based E-Line service models


Service Model

Service Flow

Service Direction

Port
Encapsulation
Mode

Service
Description

Model 1

PORT (source)

UNI-NNI

Null (source)

The source port adds


the S-VLAN tag that
corresponds to the
QinQ link to all the
received Ethernet
frames, and then
transmits the
Ethernet frames to
the sink port to
which the QinQ link
is connected.

QinQ link (sink)

Model 2

PORT (source)

QinQ (sink)

UNI-NNI

QinQ link (sink)

Model 3

PORT+C-VLAN
(source)

802.1Q (source)a
QinQ (sink)

UNI-NNI

802.1Q (source)a
QinQ (sink)

QinQ link (sink)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

The source port only


receives the
Ethernet frames that
carry C-VLAN tags.
After receiving the
Ethernet frames, it
adds the S-VLAN
tag that corresponds
to the QinQ link to
the Ethernet frames
and then transmits
the Ethernet frames
to the sink port to
which the QinQ link
is connected.
The source port adds
the S-VLAN tag that
corresponds to the
QinQ link to all the
Ethernet frames that
carry specific CVLAN tags and then
transmits the
Ethernet frames to
the sink port to
which the QinQ link
is connected.

172

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Service Model

Service Flow

Service Direction

Port
Encapsulation
Mode

Service
Description

Model 4

QinQ link (source)

NNI-NNI

QinQ (source)

The source port


transmits the
Ethernet frames that
carry a specific SVLAN tag
(corresponding to
the source QinQ
link) to the sink port
to which the sink
QinQ link is
connected. If the
source and sink
QinQ links have
different S-VLAN
tags, S-VLAN tag
swapping occurs.

QinQ link (sink)

QinQ (sink)

NOTE

a: Set Tag to Tag Aware.

Typical Application
Figure 8-4 shows the typical application of service model 1.
Service 1 and service 2 contain tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is transmitted to
NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN
tag to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are
then transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-4 Typical application of service model 1
NE 1
Port 1
Service 1
Service 2
Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label

E-Line

NE 2
Transmission
Network

Port 3

E-Line

Port 3

E-Lin
e

e
E-Lin

Add S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label

Port 1
Service 1
Service 2
Port 2

Strip S-VLAN Label

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

Data(1)

S-VLAN(300)

Data(1)

Data(1)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

Data(2)

Figure 8-5 shows the typical application of service model 2.


Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Service 1 and service 2 carry different unknown C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1
through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag
to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then
transmitted to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-5 Typical application of service model 2
Strip S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN

Data(1)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

NE 1
Service 1
Unknown CVLAN
Service 2
Unknown CVLAN

Port 1

Port 2

E-Line

NE 2
Transmission
Network

Port 3

Port 1

E-Line

Port 3

E-Lin
e

e
E-Lin

Port 2

Service 1
Unknown CVLAN
Service 2
Unknown CVLAN

Strip S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label


S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN

Data(1)

C-VLAN

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

Figure 8-6 shows the typical application of service model 3.


Service 1 and service 2 carry different C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through
port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag to service
1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted
to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-6 Typical application of service model 3
Strip S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(1)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

NE 1
Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

Port 1

Port 2

E-Line

NE 2
Port 3

Transmission
Network

E-Line

Port 3

E-Lin
e

e
E-Lin
Add S-VLAN Label

Port 1

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Service 2
Port 2 VLAN ID: 200
Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(1)

C-VLAN(100)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

Figure 8-7 shows the typical application of service model 4.


Service 1 and service 2 carry the same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through
port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

in service 1 and port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in service 2 so that the service 1 and
service 2 carry different S-VLAN tags. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to port 3.
Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-7 Typical application of service model 4
Switching S-VLAN Label
S-VLAN(100)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

Data(1)

S-VLAN(100)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

NE 1
Service 1
S-VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
S-VLAN ID: 100

Port 1

Port 2

E-Line

NE 2
Transmission
Network

Port 3

E-Line

Port 3

E-Lin
e

e
E-Lin

Port 1

Service 1
S-VLAN ID: 100

Service 2
Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100

Switching S-VLAN Label


S-VLAN(300)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(100)

Data(1)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(100)

Data(2)

8.1.5.4 8021D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


If packets of E-LAN services are forwarded only based on the MAC address table, these E-LAN
services are called 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-6 shows the 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Table 8-6 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model
Service Type

Tag Attribute

Port
Encapsulation
Mode

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

SubSwitching
Domain

802.1D bridgebased E-LAN


service

TagTransparent

Null

PORT

SVL

No division of
sub-switching
domains

Typical Application
Figure 8-8 shows the typical application of the 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services A are received at NE2 and NE3, and then transmitted over the transmission network.
These services are finally converged and switched at NE1. The services do not need to be
separated. Therefore, an 802.1D bridge is used at NE1 to groom services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-8 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2

Port 1
User A2

Port 2
NE 1

Port 1
User A1

Transmission
Network
Port 2
Port 3

802.1d bridge

NE 3

Transmission
Network

Port 1
User A3

Port 2

8.1.5.5 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


VLANs can be used to separate several E-LAN services, and then an 802.1Q bridge is divided
into multiple independent sub-switching domains. These E-LAN services are called 802.1Q
bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-7 shows the 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Table 8-7 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model
Service Type

TAG
Attribute

Port
Encapsulation
Mode

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

SubSwitching
Domain

802.1Q bridgebased E-LAN


service

C-Awared

802.1Q

PORT+VLAN

IVL

Sub-switching
domains are
divided based on
VLAN IDs.

Typical Application
Figure 8-9 shows the typical application of the 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services G and H are received at NE2 and NE3, and then are transmitted over the transmission
network. These services finally are converged and switched at NE1. As services G and H use
different VLAN planning, 802.1Q bridges are configured on NEs and sub-switching domains
are divided based on VLANs, differentiating and separating the two services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-9 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2
VLAN 100

Port 3

NE 1
Port 1
User G1

VLAN 100

VLAN 200

Port 2
User H1

Port 2
User H2

Transmission
Network
Port 3

VLAN 200

Port 1
User G2

802.1q bridge

Port 4

NE 3

Transmission
Network

VLAN 100

Port 1
User G3

802.1q bridge

Port 3

VLAN 200

Port 2
User H3

802.1q bridge

NOTE

You can configure 8.1.5.2 VLAN-based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for receiving services.

8.1.5.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services


S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-LAN services, and then a bridge is divided into
multiple independent sub-switching domains. These services are called 802.1ad bridge-based
E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-8 shows the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-8 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model


Service Type

Tag Attribute

Port
Encapsulation
Mode

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

SubSwitching
Domain

E-LAN services
based on
802.1ad bridge

S-Awared

Null or 802.1Q
(UNI port)a

PORT (The
encapsulation
mode of the UNI
port is Null.)

IVL

Sub-switching
domains are
divided based on
S-VLAN tags.

QinQ (NNI port)

PORT or PORT
+C-VLAN (The
encapsulation
mode of the UNI
port is 802.1Q.)
a

PORT+SVLAN (NNI
port)

NOTE

a: When the encapsulation mode of port is 802.1Q, set Tag to Tag Aware.

Typical Application
Figure 8-10 shows the typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services G and H are received at NE2 and NE3, and then are transmitted over the transmission
network. These services finally are converged and switched at NE1. As services G and H use
the same C-VLAN planning, extra S-VLAN tags are configured on NEs, differentiating and
separating the two services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-10 Typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model
NE 2
Add S-VLAN Label

Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(G)

C-VLAN(100)

Data( G)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

NE 2
SVLAN 300

Port 1
User G2
CVLAN 100

Port 3
SVLAN 400

NE 1
Transmission
Network

SVLAN 300

Port 1
User G1

CVLAN 100

Port 3
802.1ad bridge

CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400

User H1

Port 2
User H2

NE 3

Port 2

CVLAN 100

Port 4
802.1ad bridge

SVLAN 300

Transmission
Network

Port 1
User G3
CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400

Port 3

NE 1
Strip S-VLAN Label

Port 2
User H3
CVLAN 100

Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100)

Data( G)

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(G)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

802.1ad bridge
NE 3

Add S-VLAN Label

Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(G)

C-VLAN(100)

Data( G)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

NOTE

You can configure 8.1.5.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.

8.1.6 Typical Mobile Carrier Network Topologies for Ethernet


Services
Generally, Ethernet services are transmitted in three network topologies on a mobile carrier
network.

8.1.6.1 Networking of VLAN-Based E-Line Services


VLANs can be used to separate E-Line services. With the VLAN technology, multiple E-Line
services can share one physical channel.
On the mobile carrier network shown in Figure 8-11, the VLAN IDs that received BTS services
carry are planned in a unified manner and are unique globally. The BTS services share the
Ethernet service bandwidth on the Hybrid radio network (NE1 to NE5) and are isolated from
each other by means of VLAN IDs. The BTS services are aggregated at NE1 and then transmitted
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

through the regional backhaul network to the BSC. Therefore, in this example, services on the
Hybrid radio network of the mobile carrier network are configured as VLAN-based E-Line
services.
Figure 8-11 Networking diagram of VLAN-based E-Line services
FE
BTS
VLAN 1

NE3
FE

BTS
VLAN 2

NE2
Hybrid microwave transmission network

Regional
Backhaul Network
NE1

GE
BSC

FE
BTS
VLAN 3

NE5

NE4

FE
BTS
VLAN 4

8.1.6.2 Networking of IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


In the case of IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN service networking, data is forwarded based
on MAC addresses instead of VLAN IDs.
As shown in Figure 8-12, the mobile carrier network need not sense whether the received BTS
services carry any VLAN IDs. Services from each BTS are aggregated at NE1 and then
transmitted through the regional backhaul network to the BSC. Therefore, in this example, the
services on the Hybrid radio network (NE1 to NE6) of the mobile carrier network are configured
as IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services. The Hybrid radio network checks the destination
ports in the MAC address table according to the destination MAC addresses carried by the BTS
services and then forwards BTS services to the ports.
NOTE

IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN service packets are forwarded based on MAC addresses and may be broadcast
among all ports connected to the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Therefore, isolate the ports that need not communicate
with each other by adding the ports into a split horizon group.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-12 Networking diagram of IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services


FE
BTS

NE3
FE

BTS

NE2
Hybrid microwave transmission network

Regional backhaul
network
NE1

GE
BSC

FE
BTS

NE5

NE4

FE
BTS

NE6

Split horizon group

8.1.6.3 Networking of IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


In the case of IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service networking, services are isolated by
means of VLAN IDs. That is, the IEEE 802.1q bridge is divided into multiple sub-switching
domains, which are isolated from each other.
On the mobile carrier network shown in Figure 8-13, the VLAN IDs that received BTS services
carry are planned in a unified manner and are unique within each domain. BTS services in
different domains are isolated from each other by means of VLAN IDs and BTSs in the same
domain can communicate with each other. The BTS services are aggregated at NE1 and then
transmitted through the regional backhaul network to the BSC. Therefore, in this example, the
services on the Hybrid radio network of the mobile carrier network are configured as IEEE
802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services. The Hybrid radio network checks the destination ports in
the MAC address table according to the destination MAC addresses and VLAN IDs carried by
the BTS services and then forwards BTS services to the ports.
NOTE

IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service packets can be broadcast within each domain. Therefore, isolate the
ports that need not communicate with each other by adding the ports into a split horizon group.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-13 Networking diagram of IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services

FE
BTS
VLAN 1

NE3
FE
Domain 1
VLAN 1

NE2

BTS
VLAN 1

Domain 2
VLAN 2

Hybrid radio
network

Regional backhaul
network
NE1

GE
BSC

FE
BTS
VLAN 2

NE5

NE4

FE
BTS
VLAN 2

NE6

Split horizon group

8.1.6.4 Comparison Between the Three Networking Modes


The three networking modes differ from each other.
Table 8-9 compares the three networking modes.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-9 Comparison between the three networking modes


Networkin
g Mode

Application Scenario
Applicable
Network
Size

Applicable
VLAN ID
Allocation

Networking
of VLANbased E-Line
services

This
networking
mode is
applicable to
all network
sizes.

l The
VLAN
IDs that
received
BTS
services
carry are
planned in
a unified
manner
and are
unique
globally.

Service
Stability

Service
Security

Configurati
on
Complexity

Network
Scalability

High

l Very high

l The
configurat
ion
operations
are
complex.

l The
network is
difficult to
expand.

l Services
from
different
BTSs are
isolated
from each
other.

l BTS
services
share
Ethernet
service
bandwidt
hs and are
isolated
by means
of VLAN
IDs.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Only
point-topoint
configurat
ion is
supported
.

l To add the
new
VLAN ID
after a
BTS is
added,
you need
to change
the E-Line
configurat
ions on all
the NEs
that the
new
service
path
traverses.

183

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Networkin
g Mode

Application Scenario
Applicable
Network
Size

Applicable
VLAN ID
Allocation

Networking
of IEEE
802.1d
bridge-based
E-LAN
services

It is
recommende
d that the
network
contains less
than 50 BTSs.

l The
network
need not
sense
whether
the
received
BTS
services
carry any
VLAN
IDs.

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Service
Stability

Service
Security

Configurati
on
Complexity

Network
Scalability

Medium

l Low

l The
configurat
ion
operations
are
simple.

l The
network is
easy to
expand.

l The
service
packets
can be
broadcast
on the
entire
network.

l Services
need not
be
isolated
between
different
ports
connected
to the
same
bridge.a

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Point-tomultipoint
configurat
ion is
supported
.

l After a
BTS is
added,
you need
not
change
the
configurat
ions of
other NEs
on the
network.
Instead,
you only
need to
change
the
mounted
ports on
the NE
connected
to the base
station.

184

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Networkin
g Mode

Application Scenario
Applicable
Network
Size

Applicable
VLAN ID
Allocation

Networking
of IEEE
802.1q
bridge-based
E-LAN
services

This
networking
mode is
applicable to
all network
sizes,
especially to a
network that
is divided into
several
domains.

l The
VLAN
IDs that
received
BTS
services
carry are
planned in
a unified
manner
and are
unique
within
each
domain.

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Service
Stability

Service
Security

Configurati
on
Complexity

Network
Scalability

Medium

l High

l The
configurat
ion
operations
are
simple.

l The
network is
easy to
expand.

l The
service
packets
are
broadcast
within
each
domain
and are
isolated
between
different
domains.

l The BTS
services
from
different
domains
are
isolated
from each
other by
means of
VLAN
IDs.
l BTS
services
within a
domain
need not
be
isolated
from each
other.a

l Point-tomultipoint
configurat
ion is
supported
.

l After a
BTS is
added in a
domain,
you need
not
change
the
configurat
ions of the
other NEs
in the
domain or
the
configurat
ions of
NEs in the
other
domains.
Instead,
you only
need to
change
the
mounted
ports and
VLAN
IDs on the
NE
connected
to the base
station.

NOTE

a: To block communication between certain ports connected to a bridge, you need to add the ports into a split
horizon group.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.1.7 MAC Address Table Management


Entries in a MAC address table show the mapping between MAC addresses and ports. The entries
can be divided into dynamic entries, static entries, and blacklist entries.
l

Dynamic entry
A dynamic entry is obtained by a bridge in SVL or IVL mode. A dynamic entry will be
aged out and will be lost after the Ethernet processing unit is reset.

Static entry
A static entry is manually added to the MAC address table by a network administrator on
the NMS. A static entry will not be aged out. Generally, a static entry is configured if a
piece of equipment with a known MAC address is mounted to a port and the equipment
has constant heavy traffic. A static entry is not lost after the Ethernet processing unit is
reset.

Blacklist entry
A blacklist entry is also called a MAC disabled entry or blackhole entry. If the source MAC
address or destination MAC address of a data frame is defined in a blacklist entry, this data
frame is discarded. A blacklist entry is configured by a network administrator. A blacklist
entry will not be aged out, and will not be lost after the Ethernet processing board is reset.
NOTE

An forwarding entry is automatically deleted if it is not updated within a specified period, that is, no new
packet from the MAC address defined in the entry is received to enable the re-learning of this MAC address
within a specified period. This mechanism is called aging, and the specified period is called aging time.

8.1.8 VLAN Forwarding Table for E-Line Services


Generally, the VLAN IDs of VLAN-based E-Line services are not changed. If changing VLAN
IDs is required, configure a VLAN forwarding table.
For VLAN-based E-Line services, the VLAN IDs on the source and sink nodes are usually set
to the same value. If packets carry different VLAN IDs on the source and sink nodes, these
VLAN IDs need to be set for the source and sink nodes of the E-Line services. In addition, you
need to configure a VLAN forwarding table to achieve the switch of VLAN IDs at the source
and sink nodes.
Figure 8-14 shows an application of the VLAN forwarding table. In this figure, service 1 carries
a VLAN ID of 100, and it is transmitted to NE1 through port 1. On a transmission network, the
VLAN ID of service 1 may be in conflict with the VLAN IDs of other services. To avoid this
situation, the VLAN ID of service 1 must be changed to another value before it is transmitted
on the transmission network and then be changed to the original value after it is transmitted out
of the transmission network. Therefore, a VLAN forwarding table is configured at NE1 and
NE2, so that the VLAN IDs of services between port 1 and port 3 can be changed as required.
For service 1, when it traverses NE1, the VLAN ID is changed from 100 to 200 and then changes
back to 100 again at NE2.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-14 Application of the VLAN forwarding table in E-Line services


NE 1
Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

NE 2

Port 1

Port 1

E-Lin
e

Port 3

Transmission
Network

Service 1
VLAN ID: 200

Port 3

e
E-Lin

Service 1
VLAN ID: 200

VLAN Forwarding Table


Source
Interface
Port 1

Source
VLAN ID
100

Port 3

200

VLAN Forwarding Table

Sink
Sink
Interface VLAN ID
200
Port 3
Port 1

100

Source
Interface
Port 1

Source
VLAN ID
100

Port 3

200

E-Line Service Information Table


Source
Interface

Source
VLAN ID

Port 1

100, 200

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Port 1

100

E-Line Service Information Table

Sink
Sink
Interface VLAN ID
Port 3

Sink
Sink
Interface VLAN ID
200
Port 3

100, 200

Source
Interface

Source
VLAN ID

Port 1

100, 200

Sink
Sink
Interface VLAN ID
100, 200

Port 3

8.1.9 Split Horizon Group


To separate services that are converged and to prevent a broadcast storm resulting from a service
loop, you can configure a split horizon group for the E-LAN services at the specified nodes.
After the configuration, the logical ports in one split horizon group cannot forward packets to
each other.
Figure 8-15 shows a typical application of the split horizon group. NEs on the network are
configured with E-LAN services, and the east and west IF_ETH ports and service access ports
are configured as mounted ports of a bridge. In this case, if a split horizon group is not configured
at NE1, broadcast storm occurs due to a network loop as the east and west IF_ETH ports can
forward packets to each other. If a split horizon group is created at NE1 and the east and west
IF_ETH ports are configured as members of the split horizon group, the east and west IF_ETH
ports do not forward packets to each other. Therefore, a service loop is prevented.
Figure 8-15 Split horizon group
NE1
BSC

Split horizon group

BTS
NE2

NE4

BTS

BTS

NE3
BTS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NOTE

l ERPS can prevent a service loop on a ring network. If ERPS is already enabled for a ring network, a split
horizon group is not needed as it may affect ERPS operation.
l On the OptiX RTN 910, only the split horizon group configuration based on physical ports is supported.
Therefore, the logical ports mapped from a physical port are added to the split horizon group automatically.

8.1.10 Protection for Native Ethernet Services


The OptiX RTN 910 supports three protection modes for Native Ethernet services, namely,
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS), link aggregation group (LAG), and multiple
spanning tree protocol (MSTP).

ERPS
ERPS is applicable to ring physical networks and can provide protection for the E-LAN services
between all the nodes on the ring network. Generally, when a ring network is configured with
ERPS, the RPL node blocks the RPL port on one side so that all the services are transmitted
through the ports on the other side. In this manner, service loops are prevented. If a section of
link fails or an NE becomes faulty, the RPL node unblocks its RPL port so that the services are
switched from the faulty point to the RPL port for transmission. In this manner, protection for
the ring network is achieved.
The Ethernet ring network shown in Figure 8-16 is configured with ERPS. Generally, the RPL
node (NE D) blocks its RPL port that is connected to NE A, and all the services are transmitted
over the link NE A <-> NE B <-> NE C <-> NE D. When the link between NE A <-> NE B
becomes faulty, NE D unblocks the blocked port so that the services can be transmitted over the
link NE A <-> NE D <-> NE C <-> NE B.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-16 Implementation of ERPS

NE A

NE D

NE B

NE C

Protection switching

Failure

NE A

NE D

NE B

NE C
Link
Ethernet service direction
Blocked port

LAG
Link aggregation allows multiple links that are attached to the same equipment to be aggregated
to form a link aggregation group (LAG) so that the bandwidths and availability of the links
increase. The aggregated links can be considered as a single logical link.
As shown in Figure 8-17, the LAG provides the following functions:
l
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Increased the link capacity


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

The LAG provides users with a cost-effective method for increasing link bandwidth. The
users obtain data links with higher bandwidths by combining multiple physical links into
one logical link without upgrading the existing equipment. The bandwidth of the logical
link is equal to the sum of the bandwidths of the physical links. The aggregation module
distributes the traffic to different members by using the load balancing algorithm, achieving
the load balancing at the link level.
l

Improved the link availability


The links in a LAG provide backup for each other dynamically. When a link fails, another
link in the LAG quickly takes over. This process in which link aggregation starts the backup
link only applies to the links in the same LAG and it cannot be performed on links that are
not in the LAG.

Figure 8-17 LAG


Link 1
Link 2
Ethernet
packet

Link 3

Ethernet
packet

Link aggregation
group

MSTP
The OptiX RTN 910 supports only the MSTP protocol that uses the common and internal
spanning tree (CIST). The MSTP that uses the CIST can be used as a rapid spanning tree protocol
(RSTP). The RSTP is applicable in case of a network loop. This protocol adopts certain
algorithms to reconstruct a loop network into a loop-free tree network and therefore prevents
Ethernet frames from increasing and cycling in an endless manner on the loop network.
On the OptiX RTN 910, the MSTP is used to prevent a network loop on the access side.
See Figure 8-18. When the user equipment is connected to the OptiX RTN 910 through two
different trails, you can configure the ports on the OptiX RTN 910 that are connected to the user
network into a port group. This port group, together with the switch on the user network, can
run the MSTP. If a service access link becomes faulty, the MSTP enables a re-configuration to
generate the spanning tree topology, providing protection for the user network that is configured
with multiple access points.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-18 Prevention of network loops on the access side


Root

Root

Port group
CIST
Blocked Port

8.2 Configuration Procedure


The service configuration procedure differs according to the specific service type.

8.2.1 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point


Transparently Transmitted E-Line Services)
Configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services in an end-to-end mode
includes configuring the service information, port information, protection information, and QoS
information, and verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-19 shows the procedures for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted ELine services in an end-to-end mode.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-19 Configuration flowchart (point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports

Configuring IF_ETH
ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line
services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet
service configurations

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-10 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type
to Null.
l In the case of an Ethernet port that is connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to be the same value as the
external equipment (the working mode of the external
equipment is generally auto-negotiation). In the case of an
Ethernet port within the network, set Working Mode to
Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.2
Configuring
the Traffic
Control of
Ethernet
Ports

Required when the flow control function is enabled on the


external equipment to which the Ethernet port is connected.
Set the parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation
flow control function, set Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.
Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
Null.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.
When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-11 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line


Services
Table 8-12 Procedures for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services
Operation

Description

A.2.5.1
Creating
Optical Fibers
by Using the
Search Method

Perform this task to create radio links if they have not been created on
Main Topology of the U2000.

A.2.5.2
Creating
Fibers
Manually

Required when Ethernet services are transmitted over FE/GE links.


Set the parameters as follows:
l If FE/GE ports are connected through optical fibers, set Fiber/Cable
to Fiber. If FE/GE ports are connected through electrical cables, set
Fiber/Cable to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate Address to No.

A.13.1.1
Creating ELine Services
over Native
Ethernet

Required.
Set related parameters according to the service planning information and
parameter planning information.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-13 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-14 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.2 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based E-Line


Services)
Configuring VLAN-based E-Line services in an end-to-end mode includes configuring the
service information, port information, protection information, and QoS information, and
verifying the service configurations.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-20 provides the procedures for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services in an endto-end mode.
Figure 8-20 Configuration flowchart (VLAN-based E-Line services)
Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports

Configuring IF_ETH ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet service


configurations

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-15 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q in the case of ports that transmit only Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags.
l In the case of ports that transmit both Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried
by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set
Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of the Ethernet port that is connected to the
external equipment, set Working Mode to be the same
value as the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation). In the
case of the Ethernet ports within the network, set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.2
Configuring
the Traffic
Control of
Ethernet
Ports

Required when the flow control function is enabled on the


external equipment to which the Ethernet port is connected.
Set the parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation
flow control function, set Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.7.3
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged
frames), set TAG to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set TAG to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
NOTE
If Port Mode is set to Hybrid, Default VLAN ID of the port
must be different from the VLAN ID used by the VLAN subinterface.

l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and


untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.

Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.

A.6.8.2
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:

Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type to


802.1Q in the case of ports that transmit only Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags.
In the case of ports that transmit both Native Ethernet services
carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried by MPLS
tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set Encapsulation
Type to 802.1Q.

l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged


frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and
untagged frames, set Tag to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.
When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-16 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring VLAN-Based E-Line Services


Table 8-17 Procedures for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services
Operation

Description

A.2.5.1
Creating
Optical Fibers
by Using the
Search Method

Perform this task to create radio links if they have not been created on
Main Topology of the U2000.

A.2.5.2
Creating
Fibers
Manually

Required when Ethernet services are transmitted over FE/GE links.


Set the parameters as follows:
l If FE/GE ports are connected through optical fibers, set Fiber/Cable
to Fiber. If FE/GE ports are connected through electrical cables, set
Fiber/Cable to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate Address to No.

A.13.1.1
Creating ELine Services
over Native
Ethernet

Required.

A.7.3.7
Creating a
VLAN
Forwarding
Table for an ELine Service

Required if VLAN ID swapping is required at the source and sink of the


E-Line service.

Set related parameters according to the service planning information and


parameter planning information.

Set the related parameters according to the network planning information.


NOTE
Configure the VLAN forwarding table items separately for the source port and the
sink port.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-18 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.


Set the related parameters according to the network plan.
You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-19 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.3 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based E-Line


Services)
Configuring QinQ-based E-Line services in an end-to-end mode includes configuring the service
information, port information, protection information, and QoS information, and verifying the
service configurations.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-21 shows the procedures for configuring QinQ-based E-Line services in an end-to-end
mode.
Figure 8-21 Configuration flowchart (QinQ-based E-Line services)
Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports

Configuring IF_ETH
ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line
services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet
service configurations

End

The procedures in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-20 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

Setting the
parameters of
Ethernet ports

A.6.7.1 Setting
the Basic
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to
Enabled. In the case of unused ports, set Enable
Port to Disabled.
l If a UNI can access untagged frames, set Port
Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
Null. If a UNI can access tagged frames only, set Port
Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
802.1Q.
l In the case of UNI ports that transmit both Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3
services carried by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to
Layer Mix, and set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of UNI ports that transmit both Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3
services carried by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to
Hybrid, and set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of an NNI, set Port Mode to Layer 2 and
set Encapsulation Type to QinQ.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the
jumbo frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set Max Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.2
Configuring
the Traffic
Control of
Ethernet Ports

Required when the flow control function is enabled on


the external equipment to which the Ethernet port is
connected. Set the parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set AutoNegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.

A.6.7.3 Setting
the Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Required.
In the case of an NNI that is connected to the external
equipment, set QinQ Type Domain according to the TPID of the S-VLAN that is supported by the external
equipment. In the case of NNIs within the network, QinQ
Type Domain takes the default value.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

Setting the
parameters of
IF_ETH ports

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.7.5 Setting
the Advanced
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.1 Setting
the Basic
Attributes of
IF_ETH Ports

Required.

A.6.8.2 Setting
the Layer 2
Attributes of
IF_ETH Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.4 Setting
the Advanced
Attributes of
IF_ETH Ports

Optional.

Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation


Type to QinQ.

In the case of an NNI that is connected to the external


equipment, set QinQ Type Domain according to the TPID of the S-VLAN that is supported by the external
equipment. In the case of NNIs within the network, QinQ
Type Domain takes the default value.

NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot
be set to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed
Transmission at L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission
at L3 consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-21 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring QinQ-Based E-Line Services


Table 8-22 Procedures for configuring QinQ-based E-Line services
Operation

Description

A.2.5.1
Creating
Optical Fibers
by Using the
Search Method

Perform this task to create radio links if they have not been created on
Main Topology of the U2000.

A.2.5.2
Creating
Fibers
Manually

Required when Ethernet services are transmitted over FE/GE links.


Set the parameters as follows:
l If FE/GE ports are connected through optical fibers, set Fiber/Cable
to Fiber. If FE/GE ports are connected through electrical cables, set
Fiber/Cable to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate IP Address to No.

A.13.1.1
Creating ELine Services
over Native
Ethernet

Required.
Set related parameters according to the service planning information and
parameter planning information.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-23 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-24 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.4 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridgebased E-LAN Services)


An end-to-end configuration procedure covers configuring service information, ports,
protection, and QoS, as well as verifying service configuration.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-22 shows the procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services in
end-to-end mode.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-22 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-LAN services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet service


configurations

End

The detailed information about the procedures in the flowchart is provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-25 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring IEEE 802.1d Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-26 Procedures for configuring IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Description

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using


the Search Method

Perform this task to create radio links if they


have not been created on Main Topology of
the U2000.

A.2.5.2 Creating Fibers Manually

Required when Ethernet services are


transmitted over FE/GE links.
Set the parameters as follows:
l If FE/GE ports are connected using optical
fibers, set Fiber/Cable Type to Fiber. If
FE/GE ports are connected using cables,
set Fiber/Cable Type to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate IP Address
to No.

A.13.1.2 Creating E-LAN Services over


Native Ethernet

Required.
Set related parameters according to the
service planning information and parameter
planning information.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-27 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-28 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridgebased E-LAN Services)


An end-to-end configuration procedure covers configuring service information, ports,
protection, and QoS, as well as verifying service configuration.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-23 shows the procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services in
end-to-end mode.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-23 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configure LAGs.

Configure E-LAN services

Configure QoS

Verify Ethernet service


configurations.

End

The detailed information about the procedures in the flowchart is provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-29 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-30 Procedures for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Description

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using


the Search Method

Perform this task to create radio links if they


have not been created on Main Topology of
the U2000.

A.2.5.2 Creating Fibers Manually

Required when Ethernet services are


transmitted over FE/GE links.
Set the parameters as follows:
l If FE/GE ports are connected using optical
fibers, set Fiber/Cable Type to Fiber. If
FE/GE ports are connected using cables,
set Fiber/Cable Type to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate IP Address
to No.

A.13.1.2 Creating E-LAN Services over


Native Ethernet

Required.
Set related parameters according to the
service planning information and parameter
planning information.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-31 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-32 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridgebased E-LAN Services)


An end-to-end configuration procedure covers configuring service information, ports,
protection, and QoS, as well as verifying service configuration.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-24 shows the procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services
in end-to-end mode.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-24 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-LAN services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet service


configurations

End

The detailed information about the procedures in the flowchart is provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-33 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedures for Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-34 Procedures for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Description

A.2.5.1 Creating Optical Fibers by Using


the Search Method

Perform this task to create radio links if they


have not been created on Main Topology of
the U2000.

A.2.5.2 Creating Fibers Manually

Required when Ethernet services are


transmitted over FE/GE links.
Set the parameters as follows:
l If FE/GE ports are connected using optical
fibers, set Fiber/Cable Type to Fiber. If
FE/GE ports are connected using cables,
set Fiber/Cable Type to Cable.
l Set Automatically Allocate IP Address
to No.

A.13.1.2 Creating E-LAN Services over


Native Ethernet

Required.
Set related parameters according to the
service planning information and parameter
planning information.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-35 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-36 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.7 Configuration Procedure (Point-to-Point Transparently


Transmitted E-Line Services)
This section describes how to perform parameter settings and other relevant operations as
required in the procedure for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line
services.

Configuration Flow Chart


Figure 8-25 provides the procedure for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted ELine services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-25 Configuration flow chart (point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services)
Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports

Configuring IF_ETH
ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line
services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet
service configurations

End

The procedure in the configuration flow chart is described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-37 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type
to Null.
l In the case of an Ethernet port that is connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to be the same value as the
external equipment (the working mode of the external
equipment is generally auto-negotiation). In the case of an
Ethernet port within the network, set Working Mode to
Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.2
Configuring
the Traffic
Control of
Ethernet
Ports

Required when the flow control function is enabled on the


external equipment to which the Ethernet port is connected.
Set the parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation
flow control function, set Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.
Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
Null.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.
When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-38 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line


Services
Table 8-39 Procedure for configuring point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services
Operation

Description

A.7.3.2
Configuring
UNI-UNI ELine Services

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l Set Source Port and Sink Port according to the planning information.
l Source VLANs and Sink VLANs remain null.

A.7.3.7
Creating a
VLAN
Forwarding
Table for an ELine Service

Required when the VLAN tags of the Ethernet service need to be swapped
at the source and sink.
Set the parameters according to the network planning information.
NOTE
The corresponding VLAN forwarding table entries need to be configured for the
source port and sink port.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-40 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-41 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.8 Configuration Procedure (VLAN-Based E-Line Services)


This section describes the procedures for configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information of an VLAN-based E-Line service and the
procedure for verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-26 provides the procedure for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-26 Configuration flowchart (VLAN-based E-Line services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports

Configuring IF_ETH ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet service


configurations

End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-42 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q in the case of ports that transmit only Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags.
l In the case of ports that transmit both Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried
by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set
Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of the Ethernet port that is connected to the
external equipment, set Working Mode to be the same
value as the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation). In the
case of the Ethernet ports within the network, set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.2
Configuring
the Traffic
Control of
Ethernet
Ports

Required when the flow control function is enabled on the


external equipment to which the Ethernet port is connected.
Set the parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the auto-negotiation
flow control function, set Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode to Enable Symmetric Flow Control.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.7.3
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged
frames), set TAG to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set TAG to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
NOTE
If Port Mode is set to Hybrid, Default VLAN ID of the port
must be different from the VLAN ID used by the VLAN subinterface.

l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and


untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.

Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.

A.6.8.2
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:

Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type to


802.1Q in the case of ports that transmit only Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags.
In the case of ports that transmit both Native Ethernet services
carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried by MPLS
tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set Encapsulation
Type to 802.1Q.

l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged


frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and
untagged frames, set Tag to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.
When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-43 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring VLAN-Based E-Line Services


Table 8-44 Procedure for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services
Operation

Description

A.7.3.2
Configuring
UNI-UNI ELine Services

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set Direction to UNI-UNI.
l Set Source Port and Sink Port according to the network planning
information.
l Set Source VLANs and Sink VLANs according to the network
planning information. The two parameters should be set to the same
value.

A.7.3.7
Creating a
VLAN
Forwarding
Table for an ELine Service

Required when the VLAN tags of the Ethernet service need to be switched
at the source and sink.
The parameters need to be set according to the network planning
information.
NOTE
The corresponding VLAN forwarding table items need to be configured for the
source port and sink port.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-45 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-46 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.9 Configuration Procedure (QinQ-Based E-Line Services)


This section describes the procedures for configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information of a QinQ-based E-Line service and the procedure
for verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-27 provides the procedure for configuring QinQ-based E-Line services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-27 Configuration flowchart (QinQ-based E-Line services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet
ports

Configuring IF_ETH
ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring E-Line
services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet
service configurations

End

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-47 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

Setting the
parameters of
Ethernet ports

A.6.7.1 Setting
the Basic
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to
Enabled. In the case of unused ports, set Enable
Port to Disabled.
l If a UNI can access untagged frames, set Port
Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
Null. If a UNI can access tagged frames only, set Port
Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to
802.1Q.
l In the case of UNI ports that transmit both Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3
services carried by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to
Layer Mix, and set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of UNI ports that transmit both Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3
services carried by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to
Hybrid, and set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of an NNI, set Port Mode to Layer 2 and
set Encapsulation Type to QinQ.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the
jumbo frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set Max Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.2
Configuring
the Traffic
Control of
Ethernet Ports

Required when the flow control function is enabled on


the external equipment to which the Ethernet port is
connected. Set the parameters as follows:
l When the external equipment uses the non-autonegotiation flow control function, set NonAutonegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.
l When the external equipment uses the autonegotiation flow control function, set AutoNegotiation Flow Control Mode to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control.

A.6.7.3 Setting
the Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Required.
In the case of an NNI that is connected to the external
equipment, set QinQ Type Domain according to the TPID of the S-VLAN that is supported by the external
equipment. In the case of NNIs within the network, QinQ
Type Domain takes the default value.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

Setting the
parameters of
IF_ETH ports

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.7.5 Setting
the Advanced
Attributes of
Ethernet Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.1 Setting
the Basic
Attributes of
IF_ETH Ports

Required.

A.6.8.2 Setting
the Layer 2
Attributes of
IF_ETH Ports

Optional.

A.6.8.4 Setting
the Advanced
Attributes of
IF_ETH Ports

Optional.

Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation


Type to QinQ.

In the case of an NNI that is connected to the external


equipment, set QinQ Type Domain according to the TPID of the S-VLAN that is supported by the external
equipment. In the case of NNIs within the network, QinQ
Type Domain takes the default value.

NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot
be set to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed
Transmission at L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission
at L3 consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-48 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring QinQ-Based E-Line Services


Table 8-49 Procedure for configuring QinQ-based E-Line services
Operation

Description

A.7.3.1
Configuring
the QinQ Link

Required.

A.7.3.4
Configuring
UNI-NNI ELine Services
(Carried by
QinQ Links)

Required.

Set the parameters according to the network planning information.

Set the parameters according to the network planning information.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-50 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-51 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.10 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1d Bridge-Based E-LAN


Services)
This section describes the procedures for configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information of an IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN service
and the procedure for verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flow Chart


Figure 8-28 provides the procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1d-bridge-based E-LAN services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-28 Configuration flow chart (IEEE 802.1d bridge-based E-LAN services)
Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports

Configuring IF_ETH ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring ERPS protection

Configuring E-LAN services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet service


configurations

End

The procedure in the configuration flow chart is described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-52 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l For used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. For unused
ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type
to Null.
l In the case of an Ethernet port that is connected to external
equipment, set Working Mode to be the same value as the
external equipment (generally, the working mode of the
external equipment is auto-negotiation). In the case of an
Ethernet port within the network, set Working Mode to
Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and
automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the
broadcast packet suppression function.

A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.

Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown,


Broadcast Packet Suppression, and Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold according to the actual
requirements.

Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to


Null.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.
When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-53 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-54 Procedure for configuring ERPS protection
Operation

Description

A.7.1.1
Creating
Ethernet Ring
Protection
Instances

Required when an Ethernet ring needs to be protected and service loops


need to be avoided on the Ethernet ring.

A.7.1.2 Setting
the Parameters
of Ethernet
Ring Protocol

Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need
to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(mm:ss), and
Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set
these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.

Procedure for Configuring IEEE 802.1d-Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


Table 8-55 Procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1d-bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Description

A.7.3.9 Configuring IEEE


802.1d Bridge-Based ELAN Services

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set Tag Type to Tag-Transparent.
l Set Self-Learning MAC Address to Enabled according
to the planning information.
l In the UNI tab page, set Port according to the planning
information and set VLANs/CVLAN to Null.
l To disable the packet forwarding between certain E-LAN
service ports, add the ports to Split Horizon Group
Member.

Managing
the MAC
address table

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.7.4.2
Creating a
Blacklist
Entry of
MAC
Addresses

Required when usage of E-LAN services needs to be disabled


on certain MAC address host.

A.7.4.1
Creating a
Static MAC
Address
Entry

Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not


to age.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.7.4.3
Configuring
the Aging
Parameters
of a MAC
Address
Table

A.7.5 Setting the Mode for


Processing an Unknown
Frame of the E-LAN
Service

Required if the aging function needs to be disabled or if the


default aging time (five minutes) needs to be changed.
Set the parameters according to the network planning
information.

Optional.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-56 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-57 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.11 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN


Services)
This section describes the procedures for configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information of an IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN service
and the procedure for verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-29 provides the procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-29 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configure Ethernet ports.

Configure IF_ETH ports.

Configure LAGs.

Configure ERPS protection.

Configure E-LAN services

Configure QoS

Verify Ethernet service


configurations.

End

The detailed information about the procedure in the flow chart is provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-58 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l Set Port Mode to Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q in the case of ports that transmit only Native
Ethernet services carrying VLAN tags.
l In the case of ports that transmit both Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried
by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set
Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of the Ethernet port that is connected to the
external equipment, set Working Mode to be the same
value as the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation). In the
case of the Ethernet ports within the network, set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

A.6.7.3
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged
frames), set TAG to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set TAG to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
NOTE
If Port Mode is set to Hybrid, Default VLAN ID of the port
must be different from the VLAN ID used by the VLAN subinterface.

l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and


untagged frames, set TAG to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and
automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the
broadcast packet suppression function.
Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown,
Broadcast Packet Suppression, and Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold according to the requirements.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation
Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.

A.6.8.2
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:

Set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set Encapsulation Type to


802.1Q.
In the case of ports that transmit both Native Ethernet services
carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried by MPLS
tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set Encapsulation
Type to 802.1Q.

l If all the accessed services carry VLAN tags (tagged


frames), set Tag to Tag Aware.
l If none of the accessed services carries VLAN tags
(untagged frames), set Tag to Access, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
NOTE
If Port Mode is set to Hybrid, Default VLAN ID of the port
must be different from the VLAN ID used by the VLAN subinterface.

l When the accessed services contain tagged frames and


untagged frames, set Tag to Hybrid, and set Default
VLAN ID and VLAN Priority according to the network
planning information.
A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.
When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that
permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-59 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-60 Procedure for configuring ERPS protection
Operation

Description

A.7.1.1
Creating
Ethernet Ring
Protection
Instances

Required when an Ethernet ring needs to be protected and service loops


need to be avoided on the Ethernet ring.

A.7.1.2 Setting
the Parameters
of Ethernet
Ring Protocol

Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need
to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(mm:ss), and
Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set
these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.

Procedure for Configuring IEEE 802.1q Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


Table 8-61 Procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Description

A.7.3.10 Configuring IEEE


802.1q Bridge-Based ELAN Services

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set Tag Type to C-Awared.
l Set Self-Learning MAC Address to Enabled according
to the planning information.
l In the UNI tab page, set the parameters according to the
planning information.
l To disable the packet forwarding between certain E-LAN
service ports, add the ports to Split Horizon Group
Member.

Managing
the MAC
address table

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.7.4.2
Creating a
Blacklist
Entry of
MAC
Addresses

Required when usage of E-LAN services needs to be disabled


on certain MAC address host.

A.7.4.1
Creating a
Static MAC
Address
Entry

Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not


to age.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.7.4.3
Configuring
the Aging
Parameters
of a MAC
Address
Table

A.7.5 Setting the Mode for


Processing an Unknown
Frame of the E-LAN
Service

Required if the aging function needs to be disabled or if the


default aging time (five minutes) needs to be changed.
Set the parameters according to the network planning
information.

Optional.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-62 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-63 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.2.12 Configuration Procedure (IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based E-LAN


Services)
This section describes the procedures for configuring the service information, port information,
protection information, and QoS information of an IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service
and the procedure for verifying the service configurations.

Configuration Flowchart
Figure 8-30 provides the procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN
services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-30 Configuration flowchart (IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services)


Required

Start

Optional
Configuring Ethernet ports

Configuring IF_ETH ports

Configuring LAGs

Configuring ERPS protection

Configuring E-LAN services

Configuring QoS

Verifying Ethernet service


configurations

End

The detailed information about the procedure in the flow chart is provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring Ethernet Ports


Table 8-64 Procedure for configuring Ethernet ports
Operation
Setting the
parameters
of Ethernet
ports

Description
A.6.7.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l In the case of used ports, set Enable Port to Enabled. In
the case of unused ports, set Enable Port to Disabled.
l If a UNI can access untagged frames, set Port Mode to
Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type to Null. If a UNI
can access tagged frames only, set Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q.
l In the case of UNI ports that transmit both Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried
by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix, and set
Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of an NNI, set Port Mode to Layer 2, and set
Encapsulation Type to QinQ.
l In the case of the Ethernet port that is connected to the
external equipment, set Working Mode to be the same
value as the external equipment (generally, the working
mode of the external equipment is auto-negotiation). In the
case of the Ethernet ports within the network, set Working
Mode to Auto-Negotiation.
l When jumbo frames are transmitted, set Max Frame
Length (byte) according to the actual length of the jumbo
frames. Otherwise, it is recommended that you set Max
Frame Length (byte) to 1536.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.6.7.3
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:

A.6.7.5
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of Ethernet
Ports

Required when you need to enable the port self-loop test and
automatic loopback shutdown functions or to enable the
broadcast packet suppression function.

l In the case of a UNI, if Encapsulation Type is set to


802.1Q, set TAG to Tag Aware (default value).
l In the case of an NNI that is connected to the external
equipment, set QinQ Type Domain according to the TPID of the SVLAN that is supported by the external
equipment. In the case of an NNI within the network,
QinQ Type Domain takes the default value.

Set Loopback Check, Loopback Port Shutdown,


Broadcast Packet Suppression, and Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold according to the requirements.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation
Setting the
parameters
of IF_ETH
ports

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.6.8.1
Setting the
Basic
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required.
l If a UNI can access untagged frames, set Port Mode to
Layer 2, and set Encapsulation Type to Null. If a UNI
can access tagged frames only, set Port Mode to Layer
2 and set Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of UNI ports that transmit both Native Ethernet
services carrying VLAN tags and PWE3 services carried
by MPLS tunnels, set Port Mode to Layer Mix and set
Encapsulation Type to 802.1Q.
l In the case of an NNI, set Port Mode to Layer 2 and set
Encapsulation Type to QinQ.

A.6.8.2
Setting the
Layer 2
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Required. Set the parameters as follows:

A.6.8.4
Setting the
Advanced
Attributes
of IF_ETH
Ports

Optional.

l In the case of a UNI, if Encapsulation Type is set to


802.1Q, set Tag to Tag Aware (default value).
l In the case of an NNI that is connected to the external
equipment, set QinQ Type Domain according to the TPID of the SVLAN that is supported by the external
equipment. In the case of an NNI within the network,
QinQ Type Domain takes the default value.

When the IF_ETH port transmits an Ethernet service that


permits bit errors, such as a voice service or a video service,
you can set Error Frame Discard Enabled to Disabled.
NOTE
l For the ISU2/ISX2, it is recommended that you set Speed
Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled, if the corresponding permission to enable the two
functions is already obtained.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to Enabled,
Encapsulation Type of the ISU2 and ISX2 boards cannot be set
to Null.
l Members in a PLA group do not support Speed Transmission at
L3.
l Set Speed Transmission at L2 and Speed Transmission at L3
consistently for both ends of a radio link.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports


Table 8-65 Procedure for Configuring LAG on Ethernet ports
Operation

Description

A.7.2.1
Creating a
LAG

Required if LAG protection is configured for FE/GE ports or for the


Integrated IP radio that works in N+0/XPIC mode. Set the parameters as
follows:
NOTE
For ISU2/ISX2 boards, if they have been added to a PLA group during radio link
configuration, the LAG does not need to be configured.

l Set LAG Type to the same value as that at the opposite end. Generally,
set LAG Type to Static at both ends.
l Set the Hybrid/AM attributes to the same values for the IF ports in a
LAG.
l For FE/GE ports, set Load Sharing to the same value as that at the
opposite end. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to NonSharing at both ends, if the LAG is configured only to provide
protection. It is recommended that you set Load Sharing to Sharing
at both ends, if the LAG is configured to increase the bandwidth.
l Set Load Sharing to Sharing at both ends, if Integrated IP radio works
in N+0/XPIC mode and uses LAG protection.
l Set Revertive Mode to the same value as that at the opposite end.
Generally, set Revertive Mode to Revertive at both ends. This
parameter is valid only to LAGs whose Load Sharing is set to NonSharing.
l Set Load Sharing Hash Algorithm to the same value as for the
opposite equipment. Unless otherwise specified, this parameter takes
its default value Automatic. This parameter is applicable only to loadsharing LAGs.
l It is recommended that the main and slave ports take the same settings
at both ends. In this case, you can set System Priority as required. It
is recommended that this parameter take its default value. This
parameter is valid only to static LAGs.
l For an air interface LAG, to enable microwave signal degrade to trigger
LAG switching, set Switch LAG upon Air Interface SD to
Enabled.
l Set Main Board, Main Port, and Selected Standby Ports according
to the network plan. It is recommended that the same main and slave
ports are used for the LAGs at both ends.
NOTE
Set the AM attributes to the same value for the microwave ports in a LAG.

A.7.2.2 Setting
LAG
Parameters

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Optional.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure for Configuring ERPS Protection


Table 8-66 Procedure for configuring ERPS protection
Operation

Description

A.7.1.1
Creating
Ethernet Ring
Protection
Instances

Required when an Ethernet ring needs to be protected and service loops


need to be avoided on the Ethernet ring.

A.7.1.2 Setting
the Parameters
of Ethernet
Ring Protocol

Required if the values of the default parameters of the ERPS timers need
to be changed.
Set Hold-Off Time(ms), Guard Time(ms), WTR Time(mm:ss), and
Packet Transmit Interval(s) according to the actual requirements. Set
these parameters to the same values for all the NEs on the network.

Procedure for Configuring IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based E-LAN Services


Table 8-67 Procedure for configuring IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Description

A.7.3.11 Configuring IEEE


802.1ad Bridge-Based ELAN Services

Required. Set the parameters as follows:


l Set Tag Type to S-Awared.
l Set Self-Learning MAC Address to Enabled according
to the planning information.
l In the UNI and NNI tab pages, set the parameters
according to the planning information.
l To disable the packet forwarding between certain E-LAN
service ports, add the ports to Split Horizon Group
Member.

Managing
the MAC
address table

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

A.7.4.2
Creating a
Blacklist
Entry of
MAC
Addresses

Required when usage of E-LAN services needs to be disabled


on certain MAC address host.

A.7.4.1
Creating a
Static MAC
Address
Entry

Required if you need to set certain MAC address entries not


to age.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Set the parameters according to the network planning


information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Operation

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Description
A.7.4.3
Configuring
the Aging
Parameters
of a MAC
Address
Table

A.7.5 Setting the Mode for


Processing an Unknown
Frame of the E-LAN
Service

Required if the aging function needs to be disabled or if the


default aging time (five minutes) needs to be changed.
Set the parameters according to the network planning
information.

Optional.

Procedure for Configuring QoS


Table 8-68 Procedure for configuring QoS

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Operation

Description

A.7.7.2
Modifying the
Mapping
Relationships
for the DS
Domain

Required if the default mappings for the DS domain are inapplicable.

A.7.7.3
Changing the
Ports Applied
to a DS Domain
and Their
Trusted Packet
Types

Required if the trusted packet type of the port is different from the default
trusted packet type (C-VLAN priority) applied to the DS domain.

A.7.7.1
Creating a DS
Domain

Required if you need to create more than one DS domain.

A.7.7.4
Creating a Port
Policy

Required if you need to apply QoS policies other than DS and port shaping
for a specific port.

A.7.7.6
Creating
Traffic

Required if you need to perform the ACL, CoS, CAR or shaping operation
for a specific flow over the port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.


You can learn the default mappings for the DS domain by referring to A.
7.7.10 Querying the DS Domain of a Port.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.7.7 Setting
the Port That
Uses the Port
Policy

Required if a port policy is created.

A.7.7.8
Configuring
Port Shaping

Required if you need to limit the egress bandwidth that an Ethernet service
occupies.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Set the related parameters according to the network plan.

Procedure for Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-69 Procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Description

A.7.8.1
Creating an
MD

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name and Maintenance Domain Level to
the same values for the NEs.
l For an Ethernet service between two edge nodes on the transport
network, it is recommended that Maintenance Domain Level takes its
default value of 4. For an Ethernet service between two internal NEs
on the transport network, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value
smaller than 4. For an Ethernet service between two Ethernet ports on
the same NE, set Maintenance Domain Level to a value smaller than
the value that is set in the test of an Ethernet service between two
internal NEs on the transport network.

A.7.8.2
Creating an
MA

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the same value for the NEs.
l Set Relevant Service to the same service for the NEs.
l It is recommended that you set CC Test Transmit Period to 1s.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Operation

Description

A.7.8.3
Creating
MEPs

Required for the NEs where the two Ethernet ports involved in the service
test are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Board and Port to the Ethernet ports that are involved in the service
test.
l Set MP ID to different values for MEPs in the same MD.
l If the OAM information initiated by the MEP travels through the packet
switching unit on the local NE, set Direction of the MEP to Ingress.
Otherwise, set Direction to Egress.
l Set CC Status to Active, as the MEP ID is used to identify the MEP
during the LB test.

A.7.8.4
Creating
Remote MEPs
in an MA

Required for the NE where the Ethernet ports involved in the OAM
operation are located. Set the parameters as follows:
l Set Maintenance Domain Name to the value of Maintenance
Domain Name that is set in the preceding step.
l Set Maintenance Association Name to the value of Maintenance
Association Name that is set in the preceding step.
l To ensure that an MEP can respond to the OAM operations initiated
by the other MEPs in the same MA, you need to set the other MEPs as
the remote MEPs.

Perform an LB
test to test the
Ethernet
service
configurations

Required.
The LB test result should show that no packet loss occurs.

8.3 Configuration Example (Point-to-Point Transparently


Transmitted E-Line Services)
This section considers a point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service as an example
to describe how to configure the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.

8.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
As shown in Figure 8-31, NE1 is a terminal station of a backhaul network. The service
requirements are as follows:
l

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

NE1 transparently transmits the Ethernet services from the BTS to NE2 in point-to-point
manner.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

DSCP flags are used to identify the priorities of the Ethernet services from the BTS.

To meet the preceding requirements, point-to-point transparently transmitted E-line services are
configured; in addition, corresponding QoS processing is configured.
Figure 8-31 Networking diagram (point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services)
Tranparent transmitted
E-Line service

Backhaul network

NE1

NE2

BTS

BSC

The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 8-31 are described as follows.
Table 8-70 Connections of Ethernet links (NE1)
Link

Port

Description

Between NE1 and the BTS

7-EM4T-1

Configure this port to access


services from the BTS.

Between NE1 and NE2

3-IFU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit backhaul services
from a BTS.
The Hybrid radio link
between NE1 and NE2
adopts the 1+0 nonprotection configuration. In
addition, the AM function is
enabled for the Hybrid radio
link.

8.3.2 Service Planning


You need to plan the corresponding parameter information before configuring an Ethernet
service.

8.3.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet ports.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Ethernet Port
Table 8-71 provides the information about the Ethernet port involved in the service.
Table 8-71 Ethernet port
Parameter

7-EM4T-1

Encapsulation Type

Null

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Maximum Frame Length (byte)

1536

Flow Control

Disabled

NOTE

l In this example, the GE port on the BTS works in the auto-negotiation mode. Hence, the GE port that accesses
the BTS must work in the auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in another mode, the local
Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports inside the network are
planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
Normally, if the equipment is interconnected with BTSs, the maximum frame length can also assume its
default value of 1522.
l Generally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The planning information of flow control must be the same for the equipment at both ends.

Information About the IF_ETH Ports


Table 8-72 provides the information about the IF_ETH ports that carry services.
Table 8-72 Ethernet port
Parameter

3-IFU2-1

Encapsulation Type

Null

Error Frame Discard Enabled

Enabled

NOTE

The majority of the backhaul services on the BTS are Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding function
needs to be enabled.

8.3.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet protection.
In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.3.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet services.
Table 8-73 provides the detailed service planning information.
Table 8-73 Point-to-point transparently transmitted E-line service
Parameter

NE1

Service ID

Service Name

BTStoNE2_Tline

Direction

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted

Source Port

7-EM4T-1

Source C-VLANs

Blank

Sink Port

3-IFU2-1

Sink C-VLANs

Blank

8.3.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring QoS.

QoS (DiffServ)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated according to the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding DSCP values according to
the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the DSCP value, as
shown in Table 8-74. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS configuration.
Table 8-74 Service class and PHB service class

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

PHB Service Class

DSCP

Corresponding Service
Type

CS7

56

CS6

48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

PHB Service Class

DSCP

Corresponding Service
Type

EF

40

Real-time voice service and


signaling service (R99
conversational and R99
streaming services)

AF4

32

AF3

24

Real-time OM and HSDPA


services (OM streaming and
HSPA streaming services)

AF2

16

Non-real-time R99 service


(R99 interactive and R99
background services)

AF1

BE

HSDPA data service (HSPA


interactive and background
services)

NOTE

l During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may
be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
l The default mapping relationships for the DS domain comply with the network planning requirements and
therefore do not need to be modified.
l The required trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet
type needs to be modified for service-associated Ethernet ports applied in the default DS domain.

QoS (Queue Scheduling Mode)


Generally, each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same queue scheduling mode.
Table 8-75 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
Table 8-75 Queue scheduling mode

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

PHB Service Class

Queue Scheduling Mode

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

WRR (weight = 5)

AF3

WRR (weight = 60)


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

PHB Service Class

Queue Scheduling Mode

AF2

WRR (weight = 30)

AF1

WRR (weight = 5)

BE

SP

QoS (CAR or Shaping for a Specified Service Flow)


Normally, flow control is already performed on 2G/3G base stations and BSCs/RNCs and
therefore CAR or shaping processing does not need to be performed again on the microwave
backhaul network.

QoS (Port Shaping)


If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth of
the aggregation services, you can perform port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet
service traffic that travels to the aggregation node, thus preventing congestion at the aggregation
node.
In this example, you do not need to perform port shaping.

8.3.3 End-to-End Configuration Process


Only per-NE configuration is applicable to this configuration example. That is, end-to-end
configuration is inapplicable to this configuration example.

8.3.4 Per-NE Configuration Process


This section describes the process for setting parameters of MPLS tunnels on a per NE basis.

8.3.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the process for configuring Ethernet ports.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.6.7.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the general attributes of
the Ethernet port.
The values for the relevant parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Enable Port

Enabled

Encapsulation Type

Null

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

Step 2 See A.6.8.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports and set the general attributes of the
IF_ETH port.
The values for the relevant parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-IFU2-1

Encapsulation Type

Null

----End

8.3.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.3.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)


This section describes the process for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.7.3.2 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services and configure the E-Line services.
The values for the relevant parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Service ID

Service Name

BTStoNE2_Tline

Direction

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not Transparently Transmitted

Source Port

7-EM4T-1

Source VLANs

Blank

Sink Port

3-IFU2-1

Sink VLANs

Blank
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

----End

8.3.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)


This section describes the procedures for configuring QoS.

Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in A.7.7.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain and
change the mapping relationships for the DS domain.
The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter

Value

Mapping Relation ID

Mapping Relation Name

Default Map

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
CVLAN

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

PHB

Default value

Default value

Default value

Default value

BE
AF11
AF21
AF31
AF41
EF
CS6
CS7

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
PHB

CVLAN

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

BE

Default value

Default value

Default value

Default value

AF11
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

PHB

CVLAN

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

AF21
AF31
AF41
EF
CS6
CS7

NOTE

l The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is
valid. In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.
l The default mapping relationships for the DS domain comply with the network planning requirements and
therefore do not need to be modified.

Step 2 Follow instructions in A.7.7.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their
Trusted Packet Types and change the ports that are applied to the DS domain and their trusted
packet types.
Port

Packet Type

7-EM4T-1

ip-dscp

3-IFU2-1

NOTE

The required trusted packet type is not the C-VLAN priority but DSCP value. Therefore, the trusted packet type
needs to be modified for service-associated Ethernet ports applied in the default DS domain.

Step 3 Follow instructions in A.7.7.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
The values for the WRR scheduling policy parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Policy ID

Policy Name

Port_WRR

Scheduling Weight

5 (AF4)
60 (AF3)
30 (AF2)
5 (AF1)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

The values for the port policy parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Policy ID

Policy Name

Port_Comm

WRR Scheduling Policy

2-Port_WRR

Grooming Police After Reloading

SP (CS7, CS6, EF)


WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE)

Enable Bandwidth Restriction

Disabled (for all PHBs)

Step 4 Follow instructions in A.7.7.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that
use the port policy.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm

Port

7-EM4T-1
3-IFU2-1

----End

8.3.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)


This section describes the process for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.7.8.1 Creating an MD and create an MD.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE1

Maintenance Domain Name

InterNE

Maintenance Domain Level

Step 2 See A.7.8.2 Creating an MA and create an MA.


The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value
NE1

Maintenance Domain Name

InterNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS_Tline

Relevant Service

1-BTStoNE2_Tline

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

Step 3 See A.7.8.3 Creating MEPs and create MEP points.


The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE1

Maintenance Domain
Name

InterNE

InterNE

Maintenance Association
Name

BTS_Tline

BTS_Tline

Board

7-EM4T

3-IFU2

Port

7-EM4T-1

3-IFU2-1

VLAN

MP ID

101

102

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

Step 4 A.7.8.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA.


Parameter

Value
NE1

Maintenance Domain Name

InterNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS_Tline

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

102

Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-Line service.
Use MEP ID 101 as the source maintenance point and MEP ID 102 as the sink maintenance
point to perform the LB test.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

No packet loss occurs.


----End

8.4 Configuration Example (VLAN-Based E-Line Service)


This section considers a VLAN-based E-line service as an example to describe how to configure
the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.

8.4.1 Networking Diagram


The section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network),
configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements:
l

BTS11, BTS12, and BTS15 provide FE ports whose port rate is 100 Mbit/s.

Services transmitted by each BTS carry VLAN IDs, and VLAN IDs on the entire network
are planned in a unified manner.

VLAN priorities are configured on each BTS according to service types.

To meet the preceding requirements, VLAN-based E-Line services are configured for service
transmission on each NE; in addition, corresponding QoS processing is configured.
Figure 8-32 Networking diagram (VLAN-based E-Line services)
BTS12
VLAN 110
FE
R4
GE
NE14

Packet network
FE
NE13

NE12

NE11
R4

FE

NE15

NE16
R4

BTS11
VLAN 100

BTS15
VLAN 120

The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 8-32 are described as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-76 Connections of Ethernet links (NE12)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE12 and


NE13

7-EM4T-3

Configure these ports


to transmit backhaul
services from BTSs.

Between NE12 and


NE11

3-ISU2-1

Main IF board of a 1
+1 HSB protection
group

4-ISU2-1

Standby IF board of a
1+1 HSB protection
group

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

7-EM4T-1

Between NE12 and


BTS11

Configure these ports


to access services
from BTS11.

Table 8-77 Connections of Ethernet links (NE13)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE13 and


NE14

3-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Between NE13 and


NE15

4-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Between NE13 and


NE12

7-EM4T-3

Configure this port to


transmit backhaul
services from BTSs.

Table 8-78 Connections of Ethernet links (NE14)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE14 and


NE13

3-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Between NE14 and


BTS12

7-EM4T-1

Configure this port to


access services from
BTS12.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-79 Connections of Ethernet links (NE15)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE15 and


NE16

3-ISU2-1

Between NE15 and


NE13

4-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Table 8-80 Connections of Ethernet links (NE16)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE16 and


NE15

3-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.

Between NE16 and


BTS15

7-EM4T-1

Configure these ports


to access services
from BTS15.

8.4.2 Service Planning


You need to plan the corresponding parameter information before configuring an Ethernet
service.

8.4.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet ports.

Information About Ethernet Ports


Table 8-81 to Table 8-84 provide the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit the
Ethernet services.
Table 8-81 Information about Ethernet ports (NE12)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Encapsulation type

802.1q

802.1q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length


(byte)

1536

1536

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Flow control

Disabled

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

Table 8-82 Information about Ethernet ports (NE13)


Parameter

7-EM4T-3

Encapsulation type

802.1q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length (byte)

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Table 8-83 Information about Ethernet ports (NE14)


Parameter

7-EM4T-1

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length (byte)

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Table 8-84 Information about Ethernet ports (NE16)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

7-EM4T-1

Encapsulation type

802.1q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length (byte)

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NOTE

l In this example, the FE ports on all the BTSs work in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the FE/GE port of
each NE that accesses services must work in auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in
another mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports
inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
Normally, if the equipment is interconnected with BTSs, the maximum frame length can also assume its
default value of 1522.
l Normally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The planning information of flow control must be the same for the equipment at both ends.
l In this example, all the services carry VLAN IDs. Therefore, the tag attributes of all the ports are tag aware.

Information About the IF_ETH Ports


Table 8-85 to Table 8-89 provide the information about the IF_ETH ports that carry the Ethernet
services.
Table 8-85 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE12)
Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

802.1q

802.1q

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Table 8-86 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE13)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

802.1q

802.1q

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Table 8-87 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE14)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

3-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Error frame discard

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-88 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE15)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Table 8-89 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE16)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

802.1Q

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Error frame discard

Enabled

NOTE

The majority of the BTS backhaul services are the Internet services. Hence, the error frame discarding function
needs to be enabled.

8.4.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet protection.
In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet services.
Figure 8-33 shows the planning information of the VLAN-based E-Line services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-33 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services (in an end-to-end mode)
Links-1: NE11 - NE12 - NE13 -NE15-NE16
NE11
3-ISU2-1
RNC-BTS11
RNC-BTS15
RNC-BTS12

NE12

NE13

3-ISU2-1 7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-3 4-ISU2-1

NE15

NE16

4-ISU2-1 3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

C:100
7-EM4T-3(C:100)

7-EM4T-1(C:100)
C:120

C:120
7-EM4T-3(C:120)
C:110

C:120

C:120
7-EM4T-1(C:120)

C:110

7-EM4T-3(C:110)
Links-2: NE13-NE14
NE13

NE14

7-EM4T-3 3-ISU2-1
C:110

RNC-BTS12

3-ISU2-1
C:110
7-EM4T-1(C:110)

S: S-VLAN
C: C-VLAN
Pass through
Add/Drop
Foward

Table 8-90 to Table 8-94 provide the planning information of the VLAN-based E-Line services.
Table 8-90 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services (NE12)
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

NE12
NE13 to NE11

BTS11 to NE11

Service ID

Service name

NE13toNE11_Vline

BTS11toNE11_Vline

Service direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Source C-VLANs

110,120

100

Sink port

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

Sink C-VLANs

110, 120

100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-91 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services (NE13)


Parameter

NE13
NE14 to NE12

NE15 to NE12

Service ID

Service name

NE14toNE12_Vline

NE15toNE12_Vline

Service direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Source C-VLANs

110

120

Sink port

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-3

Sink C-VLANs

110

120

Table 8-92 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services (NE14)


Parameter

NE4
BTS12 to NE13

Service ID

Service name

BTS12toNE13_Vline

Service direction

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

7-EM4T-1

Source C-VLANs

110

Sink port

3-ISU2-1

Sink C-VLANs

110

Table 8-93 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services (NE15)


Parameter

NE15
NE16 to NE13

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Service ID

Service name

NE16toNE13_Vline

Service direction

UNI-UNI

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NE15
NE16 to NE13

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

3-ISU2-1

Source C-VLANs

120

Sink port

4-ISU2-1

Sink C-VLANs

120

Table 8-94 Information about VLAN-based E-Line services (NE16)


Parameter

NE16
BTS15 to NE15

Service ID

Service name

BTS15toNE15_Vline

Service direction

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

7-EM4T-1

Source C-VLANs

120

Sink port

3-ISU2-1

Sink C-VLANs

120

8.4.2.4 Service Planning (QoS)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring QoS.

QoS (DiffServ)
DS is the basis for QoS. It is recommended that the VLAN priority or DSCP value of the BTS
services be allocated by the service type. Then, the transmission network creates the
corresponding DS domain according to the allocated VLAN priority or DSCP value. Each
Ethernet port involved in the service must use the same DS configuration.
In this example, the BTS services are allocated with corresponding VLAN priorities according
to the service type, and the NEs allocate the PHB service classes according to the VLAN priority,
as provided in Table 8-95. Each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same DS
configuration.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-95 Service class and PHB service class


PHB Service Class

VLAN Priority

Corresponding Service
Type

CS7

CS6

EF

Real-time voice service and


signaling service (R99
conversational and R99
streaming services)

AF4

AF3

Real-time OM and HSDPA


services (OM streaming and
HSPA streaming services)

AF2

Non-real-time R99 service


(R99 interactive and R99
background services)

AF1

BE

HSDPA data service (HSPA


interactive and background
services)

NOTE

l During the mapping of the PHB service class, CS7 or CS6 is not recommended, because CS7 or CS6 may
be used to transmit Ethernet protocol packets or inband DCN packets on the NE.
l The default mapping relationships for the DS domain comply with the network planning requirements and
therefore do not need to be modified.
l The default trusted packet type for each port that is applied for the default DS domain is C-VLAN priority
and therefore does not need to be modified.

QoS (Queue Scheduling Mode)


Generally, each Ethernet port involved in the service uses the same queue scheduling mode.
Table 8-96 lists the queue scheduling mode used by each Ethernet port involved in the service
in this example.
Table 8-96 Queue scheduling mode

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

PHB Service Class

Queue Scheduling Mode

CS7

SP

CS6

SP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

PHB Service Class

Queue Scheduling Mode

EF

SP

AF4

WRR (weight = 5)

AF3

WRR (weight = 60)

AF2

WRR (weight = 30)

AF1

WRR (weight = 5)

BE

SP

QoS (CAR or Shaping for a Specified Service Flow)


Normally, flow control is already performed on 2G/3G base stations and BSCs/RNCs and
therefore CAR or shaping processing does not need to be performed again on the microwave
backhaul network.

QoS (Port Shaping)


If the Ethernet bandwidth planned for the aggregation link is lower than the total bandwidth of
the aggregation services, you can perform port shaping at the edge node to limit the Ethernet
service traffic that travels to the aggregation node, thus preventing congestion at the aggregation
node.
In this example, you do not need to perform port shaping.

8.4.3 End-to-End Configuration Process


This section describes the process for data configuration in an end-to-end mode.

8.4.3.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the process for configuring Ethernet ports.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.6.7.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the basic attributes of
Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Enable Port

Enabled

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

1536

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-3

Enable Port

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

Enable Port

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Enable Port

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Step 2 See A.6.7.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes of
Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

TAG

Value
7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-3

TAG

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

TAG

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

TAG

Tag Aware

Step 3 See A.6.8.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports and set the basic attributes of
IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Step 4 See A.6.8.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes of
IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Tag

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

Tag

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Tag

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Tag

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Tag

Tag Aware

----End

8.4.3.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.4.3.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)


This section describes the process for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.2.5.2 Creating Fibers Manually and create optical fibers manually.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value
GE Optical Fiber between NE13 and
NE12

Fiber/Cable Type

Fiber

Source NE

NE13

Source NE Subrack-Slot-Board Type-Port

7-EM4T-3

Sink NE

NE12

Sink NE Subrack-Slot-Board Type-Port

7-EM4T-3

Automatically Allocate IP Address

No

Step 2 See A.13.1.1 Creating E-Line Services over Native Ethernet and create E-Line services
transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.
1.

Choose Service > Native Ethernet Service > Create E-Line Service from the Main Menu.

2.

Set the basic attributes for the E-Line service.

3.

Configure the source and sink of the E-Line service.


a.

Double-click the source NE (NE11) in the Physical Topology tab page.

b.

Select 7-EM4T-3 and set C-VLAN to 100.

c.

Click OK.

d.

Double-click the sink NE (NE12) in the Physical Topology tab page.

e.

Select 7-EM4T-3 and set C-VLAN to 100.

f.

Click OK.

g.

Select Deploy.

4.

Click Calculate Route.

5.

Click OK.

6.

Repeat Step 2.1 to Step 2.5 and configure the Ethernet services from the RNC to BTS12
and BTS15 according to the planned values in 8.4.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet
Services).

----End
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

8.4.3.4 Configuration Process (QoS)


This section describes the procedures for configuring QoS.

Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in A.7.7.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain and
change the mapping relationships for the DS domain.
NOTE

The actual mapping relationships for the default DS domain comply with the network planning information.
Therefore, you can skip this step.

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Parameter

Value

Mapping Relation ID

Mapping Relation Name

Default Map

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
CVLAN

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

PHB

Default value

Default value

Default value

BE

AF11

AF21

AF31

AF41

EF

CS6

CS7

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

PHB

CVLAN

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

BE

Default value

Default value

Default value

AF11

1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

301

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

PHB

CVLAN

AF21

AF31

AF41

EF

CS6

CS7

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

NOTE

The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

Step 2 Follow instructions in A.7.7.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their
Trusted Packet Types and change the ports that are applied to the DS domain and their trusted
packet types.
NOTE

The actual ports that are applied to the default DS domain and their trusted packet types comply with the network
planning information. Therefore, you can skip this step.

l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

7-EM4T-3

CVLAN

7-EM4T-1
3-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

3-ISU2-1

CVLAN

4-ISU2-1
7-EM4T-3

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

3-ISU2-1

CVLAN

7-EM4T-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Port

Packet Type

3-ISU2-1

CVLAN

4-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

7-EM4T-1

CVLAN

3-ISU2-1

Step 3 Follow instructions in A.7.7.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
The values for the WRR scheduling policy parameters of NE12 to NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Policy ID

Policy Name

Port_WRR

Scheduling Weight

5 (AF4)
60 (AF3)
30 (AF2)
5 (AF1)

The values for the port policy parameters of NE12 to NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Policy ID

Policy Name

Port_Comm

WRR Scheduling Policy

2-Port_WRR

Grooming Police After Reloading

SP (CS7, CS6, EF)


WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE)

Enable Bandwidth Restriction

Disabled (for all PHBs)

Step 4 Follow instructions in A.7.7.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that
use the port policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

7-EM4T-1
7-EM4T-3
3-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1
4-ISU2-1
7-EM4T-3

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1
4-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1

----End

8.4.3.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)


This section describes the process for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

304

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Procedure
Step 1 See A.7.8.1 Creating an MD and configure the MD for NE12, NE14, and NE16.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE12

NE14

NE16

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Domain Level

Step 2 See A.7.8.2 Creating an MA and create the maintenance association (MA) for NE12, NE14,
and NE16.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
l

Parameter

Value

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

BTS11_Vline

BTS11_Vline

BTS12_Vline

BTS15_Vline

Relevant
Service

1BTS11toNE11
_Vline

1NE13toNE11_
Vline

1NE13toNE11_
Vline

1NE13toNE11_
Vline

CC Test
Transmit
Period

1s

1s

1s

1s

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS12_Vline

Relevant Service

1-BTS12toNE13_Vline

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS15_Vline

Relevant Service

1-BTS15toNE15_Vline

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

Step 3 See A.7.8.3 Creating MEPs and create the MEP for NE12, NE14, and NE16.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

BTS11_Vline

BTS11_Vline

BTS12_Vline

BTS15_Vline

Board

7-EM4T

3-ISU2

3-ISU2

3-ISU2

Port

7-EM4T-1

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

VLAN

100

100

110

120

MP ID

201

200

202

205

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

Active

Active

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS12_Vline

Board

7-EM4T-1

Port

7-EM4T-1

VLAN

110

MP ID

401

Direction

Ingress

CC Status

Active

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

306

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS15_Vline

Board

7-EM4T

Port

7-EM4T-1

VLAN

120

MP ID

601

Direction

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Step 4 See A.7.8.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE12,
NE14, and NE16.
The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association Name

BTS11_Vline

BTS12_Vline

BTS15_Vline

Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(e.g:1,3-6)

201

401

601

The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS12_Vline

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

202

The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Association Name

BTS15_Vline

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

205

Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-Line services
on NE12.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 200 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MEP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 202 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MEP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 205 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MEP ID is 601 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End

8.4.4 Per-NE Configuration Process


This section describes the process for setting parameters of VLAN-based E-Line services on a
per NE basis.

8.4.4.1 Configuration Process (Ethernet Ports)


This section describes the process for configuring Ethernet ports.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.6.7.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the basic attributes of
Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Enable Port

Enabled

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

1536

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-3

Enable Port

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

Enable Port

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

Enable Port

Enabled

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Working Mode

Auto-Negotiation

Max Frame Length (byte)

1536

Step 2 See A.6.7.3 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of Ethernet Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes of
Ethernet ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

TAG
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-3

TAG

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

TAG

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
7-EM4T-1

TAG

Tag Aware

Step 3 See A.6.8.1 Setting the Basic Attributes of IF_ETH Ports and set the basic attributes of
IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

802.1Q

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Port Mode

Layer 2

Encapsulation Type

802.1Q

Step 4 See A.6.8.2 Setting the Layer 2 Attributes of IF_ETH Ports and set the Layer 2 attributes of
IF_ETH ports.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Tag

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Tag

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Tag
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Tag Aware
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Tag

Value
3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Tag Aware

Tag Aware

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
3-ISU2-1

Tag

Tag Aware

----End

8.4.4.2 Configuration Process (Ethernet Protection)


In this example, Ethernet protection is not used.

8.4.4.3 Configuration Process (Service Information)


This section describes the process for configuring service information.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.7.3.2 Configuring UNI-UNI E-Line Services and configure the E-Line services.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Value
NE13 to NE11

BTS11 to NE11

Service ID

Service Name

NE13toNE11_Vline

BTS11toNE11_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Source Port

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-1

Source VLANs

110, 120

100

Sink Port

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

Sink VLANs

110, 120

100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE14 to NE12

NE15 to NE12

Service ID

Service Name

NE14toNE12_Vline

NE15toNE12_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Source Port

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Source VLANs

110

120

Sink Port

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-3

Sink VLANs

110

120

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
BTS12 to NE13

Service ID

Service Name

BTS12toNE13_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source Port

7-EM4T-1

Source VLANs

110

Sink Port

3-ISU2-1

Sink VLANs

110

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
NE16 to NE13

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Service ID

Service Name

NE16toNE13_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
NE16 to NE13

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source Port

3-ISU2-1

Source VLANs

120

Sink Port

4-ISU2-1

Sink VLANs

120

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
BTS15 to NE15

Service ID

Service Name

BTS15toNE15_Vline

Direction

UNI-UNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source Port

7-EM4T-1

Source VLANs

120

Sink Port

3-ISU2-1

Sink VLANs

120

----End

8.4.4.4 Configuration Process (QoS)


This section describes the procedures for configuring QoS.

Procedure
Step 1 Follow instructions in A.7.7.2 Modifying the Mapping Relationships for the DS Domain and
change the mapping relationships for the DS domain.
NOTE

The actual mapping relationships for the default DS domain comply with the network planning information.
Therefore, you can skip this step.

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the main interface are provided as
follows.
Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

Mapping Relation ID

Mapping Relation Name

Default Map

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Ingress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.
CVLAN

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

PHB

Default value

Default value

Default value

BE

AF11

AF21

AF31

AF41

EF

CS6

CS7

The values for the related parameters that need to be set in the Egress Mapping Relation tab
page are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

PHB

CVLAN

SVLAN

IP DSCP

MPLS EXP

BE

Default value

Default value

Default value

AF11

AF21

AF31

AF41

EF

CS6

CS7

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NOTE

The AF1 is classified into three sub service classes, namely, AF11, AF12, and AF13, only one of which is valid.
In this example, the AF11 is used. It is the same case with the AF2, AF3, and AF4.

Step 2 Follow instructions in A.7.7.3 Changing the Ports Applied to a DS Domain and Their
Trusted Packet Types and change the ports that are applied to the DS domain and their trusted
packet types.
NOTE

The actual ports that are applied to the default DS domain and their trusted packet types comply with the network
planning information. Therefore, you can skip this step.

l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

7-EM4T-3

CVLAN

7-EM4T-1
3-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

3-ISU2-1

CVLAN

4-ISU2-1
7-EM4T-3

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

3-ISU2-1

CVLAN

7-EM4T-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

3-ISU2-1

CVLAN

4-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Port

Packet Type

7-EM4T-1

CVLAN

3-ISU2-1

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Step 3 Follow instructions in A.7.7.4 Creating a Port Policy and create the port policy.
The values for the WRR scheduling policy parameters of NE12 to NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Policy ID

Policy Name

Port_WRR

Scheduling Weight

5 (AF4)
60 (AF3)
30 (AF2)
5 (AF1)

The values for the port policy parameters of NE12 to NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Policy ID

Policy Name

Port_Comm

WRR Scheduling Policy

2-Port_WRR

Grooming Police After Reloading

SP (CS7, CS6, EF)


WRR (AF4 to AF1)
SP (BE)

Enable Bandwidth Restriction

Disabled (for all PHBs)

Step 4 Follow instructions in A.7.7.7 Setting the Port That Uses the Port Policy and set the ports that
use the port policy.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

7-EM4T-1
7-EM4T-3
3-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE13 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

317

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1
4-ISU2-1
7-EM4T-3

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE15 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1
4-ISU2-1

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value
Port_Comm (Policy ID=1)

Port

3-ISU2-1

----End

8.4.4.5 Configuration Process (Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations)


This section describes the process for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 See A.7.8.1 Creating an MD and configure the MD for NE12, NE14, and NE16.
The values for the related parameters are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Value
NE12

NE14

NE16

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Domain Level

Step 2 See A.7.8.2 Creating an MA and create the maintenance association (MA) for NE12, NE14,
and NE16.
l The values for the relevant parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
l

Parameter

Value

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

BTS11_Vline

BTS11_Vline

BTS12_Vline

BTS15_Vline

Relevant
Service

1BTS11toNE11
_Vline

1NE13toNE11_
Vline

1NE13toNE11_
Vline

1NE13toNE11_
Vline

CC Test
Transmit
Period

1s

1s

1s

1s

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS12_Vline

Relevant Service

1-BTS12toNE13_Vline

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

l The values for the relevant parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS15_Vline

Relevant Service

1-BTS15toNE15_Vline

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

CC Test Transmit Period

1s

Step 3 See A.7.8.3 Creating MEPs and create the MEP for NE12, NE14, and NE16.
l The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association
Name

BTS11_Vline

BTS11_Vline

BTS12_Vline

BTS15_Vline

Board

7-EM4T

3-ISU2

3-ISU2

3-ISU2

Port

7-EM4T-1

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

VLAN

100

100

110

120

MP ID

201

200

202

205

Direction

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Active

Active

Active

l The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS12_Vline

Board

7-EM4T-1

Port

7-EM4T-1

VLAN

110

MP ID

401

Direction

Ingress

CC Status

Active

l The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Association Name

BTS15_Vline

Board

7-EM4T

Port

7-EM4T-1

VLAN

120

MP ID

601

Direction

Ingress

CC Status

Active

Step 4 See A.7.8.4 Creating Remote MEPs in an MA and create the remote MEP points for NE12,
NE14, and NE16.
The values for the related parameters of NE12 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance
Domain Name

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

EdgeNE

Maintenance
Association Name

BTS11_Vline

BTS12_Vline

BTS15_Vline

Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(e.g:1,3-6)

201

401

601

The values for the related parameters of NE14 are provided as follows.
Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS12_Vline

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

202

The values for the related parameters of NE16 are provided as follows.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Maintenance Domain Name

EdgeNE

Maintenance Association Name

BTS15_Vline

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

Value

Remote Maintenance Point ID(e.g:1,3-6)

205

Step 5 See perform an LB test to test the Ethernet service configurations and test the E-Line services
on NE12.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 200 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MEP ID is 201 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 202 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MEP ID is 401 as the sink MEP.
l Perform the LB test by considering the MEP whose MEP ID is 205 as the source MEP and
the MEP whose MEP ID is 601 as the sink MEP.
There should be no packets lost during the LB tests.
----End

8.5 Configuration Example (QinQ-Based E-Line Service)


This section considers a QinQ-based E-line service as an example to describe how to configure
the Ethernet service according to the network planning information.

8.5.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking information about the NEs.
Based on 6.5 Configuration Example (Radio Links on the Hybrid Radio Chain Network),
configure Ethernet services according to the following requirements:
l

BTS11 to BTS15 provide FE ports whose port rate is 100 Mbit/s.

GE links to the RNC are configured with LAG protection.

The VLAN ID used by the services on a BTS is allocated by the RNC that controls the
BTS. Therefore, the VLAN IDs of services on BTSs that are controlled by different RNCs
may be the same. To solve this problem, an RNC allocates an S-VLAN ID for each BTS,
and the S-VLAN IDs on the entire network are planned in a unified manner.

VLAN priorities are configured on each BTS according to service types.

To meet the preceding requirements, QinQ-based E-Line services are configured for service
transmission on each NE; in addition, corresponding QoS processing is configured.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-34 Networking diagram (QinQ-based E-Line services)


BTS12
SVLAN 201

FE
R4
RNC

GE

GE

NE14
FE
NE13

FE

NE12

R4
BTS11
SVLAN 200

NE15

NE16

NE11

SVLAN
200,201,202

R4
BTS15
SVLAN 202
NOTE

In this example, the RNC must be capable of processing S-VLAN tags.

The connections of Ethernet links shown in Figure 8-34 are described as follows.
Table 8-97 Connections of Ethernet links (NE11)
Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE11 and


the RNC

7-EM4T-3

Main port of a LAG

7-EM4T-4

Slave port of a LAG

Configure these ports


to transmit backhaul
services from BTSs.

Between NE11 and


NE12

3-ISU2-1

Main IF board of a 1
+1 HSB protection
group

4-ISU2-1

Standby IF board of a
1+1 HSB protection
group

Configure these ports


to transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Table 8-98 Connections of Ethernet links (NE12)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE12 and


NE13

7-EM4T-3

Configure these ports


to transmit backhaul
services from BTSs.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

323

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE12 and


NE11

3-ISU2-1

Main IF board of a 1
+1 HSB protection
group

4-ISU2-1

Standby IF board of a
1+1 HSB protection
group

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

7-EM4T-1

Between NE12 and


BTS11

Configure these ports


to access services
from BTS11.

Table 8-99 Connections of Ethernet links (NE13)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE13 and


NE14

3-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Between NE13 and


NE15

4-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Between NE13 and


NE12

7-EM4T-3

Configure this port to


transmit backhaul
services from BTSs.

Table 8-100 Connections of Ethernet links (NE14)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE14 and


NE13

3-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Between NE14 and


BTS12

7-EM4T-1

Configure this port to


access services from
BTS12.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-101 Connections of Ethernet links (NE15)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE15 and


NE16

3-ISU2-1

Between NE15 and


NE13

4-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Native
Ethernet services on
Hybrid radio.

Table 8-102 Connections of Ethernet links (NE16)


Link

Port

Port Description

Description

Between NE16 and


NE15

3-ISU2-1

Configure this port to


transmit Ethernet
services on Hybrid
radio.

Between NE16 and


BTS15

7-EM4T-1

Configure these ports


to access services
from BTS15.

8.5.2 Service Planning


You need to plan the corresponding parameter information before configuring an Ethernet
service.

8.5.2.1 Service Planning (Ethernet Ports)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet ports.

Information About Ethernet Ports


Table 8-103 to Table 8-107 provide the information about the Ethernet ports that transmit the
Ethernet services.
Table 8-103 Information about Ethernet ports (NE11)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-4

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length


(byte)

1536

1536

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-4

Flow control

Disabled

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

0x88a8

Table 8-104 Information about Ethernet ports (NE12)


Parameter

7-EM4T-1

7-EM4T-3

Encapsulation type

802.1q

QinQ

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length


(byte)

1536

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Tag aware

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

Table 8-105 Information about Ethernet ports (NE13)


Parameter

7-EM4T-3

Encapsulation type

QinQ

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length (byte)

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

Table 8-106 Information about Ethernet ports (NE14)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

7-EM4T-1

Encapsulation type

802.1q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length (byte)

1536

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Parameter

7-EM4T-1

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

Table 8-107 Information about Ethernet ports (NE16)


Parameter

7-EM4T-1

Encapsulation type

802.1q

Port working mode

Auto-negotiation

Maximum frame length (byte)

1536

Flow control

Disabled

Tag attribute

Tag aware

NOTE

l In this example, the FE ports on all the BTSs work in auto-negotiation mode. Therefore, the FE/GE port of
each NE that accesses services must work in auto-negotiation mode. If the peer Ethernet port works in
another mode, the local Ethernet port must work in the same mode. The working modes of the Ethernet ports
inside the network are planned as auto-negotiation.
l In this example, to ensure that the Ethernet frames that carry more than one tag such as QinQ can traverse
the equipment, the maximum frame length is set to 1536 (bytes). If the equipment needs to transmit jumbo
frames with a greater length, set the maximum frame length according to the actual length of a jumbo frame.
l Normally, the flow control function is enabled only when the NE or the peer equipment is inadequate for
QoS processing. The planning information of flow control must be the same for the equipment at both ends.
l In this example, all the NNI ports are connected to Huawei equipment. Therefore, the QinQ type domain of
the NNI ports assumes the default value of 0x88a8.

Information About the IF_ETH Ports


Table 8-108 to Table 8-113 provide the information about the IF_ETH ports that carry the
Ethernet services.
Table 8-108 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE11)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

0x88a8

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

327

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-109 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE12)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

0x88a8

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Table 8-110 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE13)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

0x88a8

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Table 8-111 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE14)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

Error frame discard

Enabled

Table 8-112 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE15)


Parameter

3-ISU2-1

4-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

0x88a8

Error frame discard

Enabled

Enabled

Table 8-113 Information about the IF_ETH port (NE16)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Parameter

3-ISU2-1

Encapsulation type

QinQ

QinQ type domain

0x88a8

Error frame discard

Enabled

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NOTE

l All the IF_ETH ports are connected to Huawei equipment. Therefore, it is recommended that you set the
QinQ type domain to 0x88a8 for the IF_ETH ports.
l The majority of the BTS backhaul services are Internet services. Therefore, the error frame discarding
function needs to be enabled.

8.5.2.2 Service Planning (Ethernet Protection)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet protection.
To improve the reliability of service transmission, NE11 and the RNC are interconnected through
the LAG formed by two GE links. Table 8-114 provides the planning information.
Table 8-114 LAG information
Parameter

NE11

LAG type

Static (default value)

Revertive mode

Non-revertive

Load sharing mode

Non-sharing (default value)

System priority

32768 (default value)

Main port

7-EM4T-3

Slave port

7-EM4T-4

NOTE

In this example, the bandwidth of the Ethernet services is much lower than the bandwidth of a GE port. Therefore,
you need not configure the LAG to the load-sharing mode for increasing the bandwidth.

8.5.2.3 Service Planning (Ethernet Services)


The service planning information contains the information about all the parameters required for
configuring Ethernet services.
Figure 8-35 shows the planning information of the QinQ-based E-Line services.

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

329

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Figure 8-35 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service


Links-1: NE11 - NE12 - NE13 -NE15-NE16
NE11
3-ISU2-1
RNC-BTS11
RNC-BTS15
RNC-BTS12

NE12

NE13

3-ISU2-1 7-EM4T-3

7-EM4T-3 4-ISU2-1

NE15

NE16

4-ISU2-1 3-ISU2-1

3-ISU2-1

S:200
7-EM4T-1(null)

7-EM4T-3(S:200)
S:202

S:202

7-EM4T-3(S:202)
S:201

S:202

S:202
7-EM4T-1(null)

S:201

7-EM4T-3(S:201)
Links-2: NE13-NE14
NE13

NE14

7-EM4T-3 3-ISU2-1
S:201

RNC-BTS12

3-ISU2-1
S:201
7-EM4T-1(null)

S: S-VLAN
C: C-VLAN
Pass through
Add/Drop
Foward

Table 8-115 to Table 8-120 provide the planning information of the QinQ-based E-Line
services.
Table 8-115 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service (NE11)
Parameter

NE11
BTS12 to the RNC

BTS11 to the RNC

BTS15 to the RNC

Service ID

Service name

BTS12toRNC_Qline

BTS11toRNC_Qline

BTS15toRNC2_Qli
ne

Service direction

NNI-NNI

NNI-NNI

NNI-NNI

BPDU

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Source port

Source C-VLANs

QinQ link (source)

ID:4
Port:7-EM4T-3

ID:5
Port:7-EM4T-3

ID:6
Port:7-EM4T-3

S-VLAN:201

S-VLAN:200

S-VLAN:202

ID: 1

ID: 2

ID: 3

Port: 3-ISU2-1

Port: 3-ISU2-1

Port: 3-ISU2-1

S-VLAN: 201

S-VLAN: 200

S-VLAN: 202

QinQ link (sink)

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

Table 8-116 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service (NE12)


Parameter

NE12
BTS11 to NE11

BTS12 to NE11

BTS15 to NE11

Service ID

Service name

BTS11toNE11_Qlin
e

BTS12toNE11_Qlin
e

BTS15toNE11_Qlin
e

Service direction

UNI-NNI

NNI-NNI

NNI-NNI

BPDU

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Not transparently
transmitted

Source port

7-EM4T-1

Source C-VLANs

QinQ link (source)

ID: 2

ID: 4

Port: 7-EM4T-3

Port: 7-EM4T-3

S-VLAN: 201

S-VLAN: 202

ID: 1

ID: 3

ID: 5

Port: 3-ISU2-1

Port: 3-ISU2-1

Port: 3-ISU2-1

S-VLAN: 200

S-VLAN: 201

S-VLAN: 202

QinQ link (sink)

Table 8-117 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service (NE13)


Parameter

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

NE13
BTS12 to NE12

BTS15 to NE12

Service ID

Service name

BTS12toNE12_Qline

BTS15toNE12_Qline

Service direction

NNI-NNI

NNI-NNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

Source C-VLANs

QinQ link (source)

ID: 1

ID: 3

Port: 7-EM4T-3

Port: 7-EM4T-3

S-VLAN: 201

S-VLAN: 202

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NE13

QinQ link (sink)

BTS12 to NE12

BTS15 to NE12

ID: 2

ID: 4

Port: 3-ISU2-1

Port: 4-ISU2-1

S-VLAN: 201

S-VLAN: 202

Table 8-118 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service (NE14)


Parameter

NE14
BTS12 to NE13

Service ID

Service name

BTS12toNE13_Qline

Service direction

UNI-NNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

7-EM4T-1

Source C-VLANs

QinQ link (source)

QinQ link (sink)

ID: 1
Port: 3-ISU2-1
S-VLAN: 201

Table 8-119 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service (NE15)


Parameter

NE15
BTS15 to NE13

Issue 04 (2013-11-30)

Service ID

Service name

BTS15toNE13_Qline

Service direction

NNI-NNI

BPDU

Not transparently transmitted

Source port

Source C-VLANs

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System


Configuration Guide (U2000)

Parameter

8 Configuring Native Ethernet Services on the Packet Plane

NE15
BTS15 to NE13

QinQ link (source)

ID: 1
Port: 3-ISU2-1
SVLAN: 202

QinQ link (sink)

ID: 2
Port: 4-ISU2-1
S-VLAN: 202

Table 8-120 Information about the QinQ-based E-Line service (NE16)


Parameter

NE16
BTS15 to NE15

Service ID

Service name

BTS15toNE15_Qline

Service direction

UNI-NNI

BPDU

Not transpare